Home

ACS310 User's Manual

1. Frame size R4 IP20 NEMA 1 3AUA0000051133 A 332 Dimensions Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service Network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field Ak ED ED PAIDID ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FI 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 Internet www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785 3200 800 HELP 365 Fax 262 780 5135 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd 3AUA0000044201 Rev A EN EFFECTIVE 15 11 2008 No 1
2. lt a _ _ References _ Process l O cyclic Status Word SW 3 gt Actual values 3 gt Service messages acyclic Parameter R W The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources eg digital and analog inputs Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 267 Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control install the fieldbus according to instructions given in section Connecting the embedded fieldbus on page 54 The communication through the fieldbus link is initialised by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232 The communication parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted See the table below Parameter Alternative Setting for Function Information settings fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL STD MODBUS Initializes embedded fieldbus SEL STD MODBUS _ with RS 485 communication MODBUS RS232 MODBUS RS232 with RS 232 ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 Any Defines the station ID address of the RS 232 485 link No two stations on line may have the same address 5303 EFB BAUD 1 2 kbit s Defines the communication RATE 2 4 kbit s speed of the RS 232 485 link 4 8 kbit s
3. 84 Control panels E Output mode In the Output mode you can e monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 07 OPERATING DATA e change the direction of the motor rotation e set the frequency reference e adjust the display contrast e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control EXIT You get to the Output mode by pressing 7 repeatedly The top right corner of the Loc Loc display shows the reference 49 1 Hz value The center can be A configured to show up to three 10 7 signal values or bar graphs see DIR 00 00 MENU DIR 00 00 MENU page 87 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation If you are not in the Output mode press EP repeatedly until you get there Ifthe drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing 29 The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode To change the direction from forward shown on the status line to reverse J shown on the status line or vice versa press wa Note Parameter 7003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 00 00 MENU REQUEST Control panels 85 How to set the frequency reference Display EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press ES repeatedly until you get there Ifthe drive is in remote control REM shown on
4. Internal 100 scale X X Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0 VALUE the 100 scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values X X Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4010 SET POINT Selects the source for the process PID controller reference Al1 SEL signal eem foma o COMM Al1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 271 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 10 Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 271 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM 218 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3U 4D NC _ Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 12 Reference decrease The program stores the active reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 14 REF Al1 Al2
5. Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 279 The following table and the state diagram later in this section describe the Control Word content for the ABB Drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the following block diagram ABB Drives profile Control Word parameter 5319 Bit Name vame Comments oOo OFF1 CONTROL Enter READY TO OPERATE Po Stop along currently active deceleration ramp 2203 2206 1 Enter OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2 CONTROL Continue operation OFF2 inactive Emergency OFF drive coast to stop Enter OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED OFF3 CONTROL Continue operation OFF3 inactive Emergency stop drive stops within time defined by par 2208 Enter OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Warning Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode INHIBIT OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run Enable signal must be active see parameter 7607 If par 7607 is set to COMM this bit also activates the Run Enable signal 0 Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED 4 Note Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile RAMP_OUT_ 1 Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT ZERO ABB DRV ENABLED FULL Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNC
6. o o ooooooooorr ee eens 59 How to perform a guided start up oo oooooooocno eens 62 How to control the drive through the I O interface 0 0 0 ee 65 9 Control panels What this chapter contains 0 00 eee ene eee 67 ADOUL CONMCIPANGIS sauce adie chutes a BOSE ee ud A ee ae eee Ee 67 COMO AUN sara este ete hep ae tee Hic aE Kec PA toe Apc e wl ance hea ons Bee Pa Bhima A ane han aed 67 Basic Control Panel 2 annuau aaa Shoe Ow oS Sheet da E bowed bbe a aii ei 68 Features oe pace Sime ares Saha me cart ahs ee WES aon era a ore eines 68 A a a a e a 69 OPON ae dare duce e Ee E Esa ie 70 Qutput mode ckc cd deaetacavean densa ddd etd AA a ade ena es 72 Reference mode eL epa ltda Soho eee Ho ave Fa ge oe ees 13 Parameter mode uta rs Set She es vers Se god as SG cee es et ete ed 74 Cy ON 76 Basic Control Panel alarm codes o oo oo o ee eae 77 Assistant Control Panel 0 000 000 0000 o 78 Features o onama os a ee ee Ee ee ee ee Ge 78 OvervieW dui Ses Sane e ica 79 cas A et Geno oe wn ae dos alc Pap ast Dh aetna eee oe ae wa deans are 80 Oia aane e AA bake e boned eta eaee nea SE en E E 84 Parameters MOG 4 2 s 2448656 tek SbS ESO a DEE e HERE ERS a eELE SEES 86 Assistants INOUE 2 nun bkwdcara heed added Bede laa a edie aire tees et eae eu 88 Changed Parameters mode 00 ce eee eens 90 Faut Oger MOGE stas Sa eects don Gee ed eae idas 91 Time and Date Mode o socios a 05 deeb
7. Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 283 DCU communication profile Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits two different signals are needed for both the control 0307 and 0302 and status 0303 and 0304 words The following tables describe the Control Word content for the DCU profile DCU Profile Control Word parameter 0301 STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter 2102 or the stop mode requests bits 7 and 8 Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command o No operation SoSo SS 1 START 1 Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command o momon OOO REVERSE Reverse direction The direction is defined by using C i XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 sign of the ETS values 0 Forward direction mo 0 Enter external control made 4 RESET 7 5 ext CO eee A T o 9 cinato un Enable ooo p R E along TA active Op eration ramp bit 10 E O value must be 1 STOP 0 Nooperation Jismi T eee o Pooran SSS S S es 1 Coast to stop BitO value mustbe 1 E STOP 0 No operation S SSS S S 10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 defined by parameters 2205 2207 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 defined by parameters 2202 2204 11 RAMP_OUT_0 Force ramp output to zero E o No operation SOSS 12 RAMP_HOLD al o no operation OSS 284 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus
8. Setting range depends on parameter 7507 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO 0 0 mA See the figure for parameter 7502 AO1 CONTENT MIN 0 0 20 0 mA Minimum value 0 mA 1505 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO 20 0 mA AO1 See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN 1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO ie the 0 1 s time within 63 of a step change is reached See the figure for parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant TEM Parameter view Run le parameter lo gt 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run Enable signal NOT SEL NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run Enable signal DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Run 1 Enable If Run Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running a Ses selection on o poo NO 176 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run Enable 7 signal Run Disable ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and
9. Bit O Reserved Bit 2 3 Reserved Bit 4 CURR MEAS Bit 5 SUPPLY PHASE Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 OVERSPEED Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 DRIVE ID Bit 10 CONFIG FILE Bit 11 SERIAL 1 ERR Bit 12 EFB CON FILE Bit 13 FORCE TRIP Bit 14 MOTOR PHASE Bit 15 OUTP WIRING 158 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0307 Feel WORD JA 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies ee fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page Bit0 EFB1 00 2020 0 EFB 1 A 1 EFB 2 0308 ALARM WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 1 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word 0309 ALARM WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 2 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 87 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit O Reserved Bit 1 PID SLEEP Bit 0 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE Bit 2 UNDERVOLTAGE Actual signals and parameters 159 All actual signals No Name Value Description 0310 ALARM WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 3 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit O INLET VERY LOW Bit
10. DH T 4422 PIPEFILL Defines the n ses used in Precharge The PID 0 STEP reference ramp time is specified by parameter 4032 PID REF ACC TIME The speed step is added to the reference after the time defined by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY has elapsed and the change in feedback defined by parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE has not been reached 0 0 100 0 Speed step in percent of the maximum speed output 1 0 1 4423 REQ ACT Defines the requested change in process feedback during CHANGE the time that is set by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY If the requested change in the feedback is not reached 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum speed 1 0 1 4424 ACT CHANGE Defines the time that is waited after the feedback value is DELAY compared with the old feedback value If parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE is measured in the feedback value the speed reference stays as it is If REQ ACT CHANGE is not seen in the feedback value the value of parameter 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference 0 1 6000 0s_ Delay time 1 4425 PID ENABLE Defines the level when Precharge is disabled and PID is DEV enabled When the level is reached PID is enabled PID is executed as parameterized If reference ramp times are set they are used 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum feedback 1 0 1 nN 0 e 10 Actual signals and parameters 235 All
11. For installation in the United States branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code NEC and any applicable local codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 310 For installation in Canada branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 310 Power cable selection See section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Power cable connections For the connection diagram and tightening torques see section Connecting the power cables on page 47 Overload protection The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code US CG C Tick marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Mana
12. e motor nominal speed parameter 9908 e motor nominal power parameter 9909 O Select the application macro parameter 9902 according to how the control cables are connected The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Start up and control with I O 61 Check the direction of the motor rotation e If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 To go to the Main menu press Sq if the FWD bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press CY repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys ca N v 2 until you see rEF and press 37 Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key ca Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press to stop the motor reverse direction direction To change the direction of the motor rotation e f parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not Loc visible first set parameter 1611 PARAMETER 1 6 1 1 VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW PAR FWD Invert the phases by changing the value of LOC parameter 9914 to the opposite ie from O NO 9 9 14 to 1 YES or vice versa PAR FWD Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above Set parameter 9914 back to 2 SHORT VIEW Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no
13. 50 Al AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 15 REF Al Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 16 REF Al1 50 Al2 AI1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 17 REF Al1 50 Al2 19 INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4077 INTERNAL SETPNT 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 or 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 See also parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL DI4U 5D NC See selection DI3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input 4011 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as process PID controller 40 SETPNT reference when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL Mx Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4012 SETPOINT Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference 0 0 MIN signal source See parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL 500 0 500 0 Value in percent Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the PID reference source value of parameter 4070 is Al1 The reference minimum and maximum correspond the 7307 MINIMUM Al1 and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows Ref Ref MAX gt MIN MIN gt MAX 1301 1302 A 1 1301 1302 A 1 4013 SETPOINT Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference 100 0 MAX signal source See parameters 4010 SET POINT SEL and 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4014 FBK SEL
14. Hand Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is needed Some control signal terminals are reserved to one device the rest for the other One digital input selects between the terminals devices in use 100 Application macros Macro Suitable applications PID Control Process control applications for example different closed loop control systems such as pressure control level control and flow control It is possible to switch between process and speed control Some control signal terminals are reserved for process control others for speed control One digital input selects between process and speed control PFC Control Pump alternation applications for example booster stations in buildings The pressure in the network is adjusted by changing the speed of the pump according to the signal received from the pressure transducer and adding auxiliary pumps directly on line when needed SPFC Control Soft PFC Control for pump alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started User The user can save the customized standard macro ie the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time For example two user macros can be used when switching between two different motors is required Application macros 101 Summary of the I O connections of the application macros The fo
15. Off time time time time time time time Number of steps Program features 145 E Settings Parameter group 46 PUMP CLEANING Load analyzer The load analyzer can be used for analyzing the customer s process and sizing the drive and the motor The peak value is logged at 2 ms level and the distribution loggers are updated on 0 2 s 200 ms time level Three different values can be logged 1 The measured current is logged continuously The distribution as a percentage of the maximum current is shown in ten classes 2 One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak maximum value The peak value of the signal peak time time when the peak value was detected as well the frequency current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown 3 One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude distribution The base value 100 value can be set by the user Logger 1 cannot be reset Loggers 2 and 3 can be reset by a user defined method They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is changed E Settings Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER Load analyzer settings parameters 6407 6405 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER Load analyzer results parameters 6406 6433 146 Program features PFC and SPFC control E PFC control Pump and Fan Control PFC control switches auxiliary pumps on and off as required by capacity changes Autochange function alt
16. Operation Storage installed for in the protective in the protective stationary use package package 40 to 70 C 40 to 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 158 F Transportation 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F No frost allowed See section Derating on page 309 O to 95 Max 95 Max 95 No condensation allowed Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60 in the presence of corrosive gases No conductive dust allowed According to According to According to IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 1 IEC 60721 3 2 chemical gases chemical gases chemical gases Class 3C2 Class 1C2 Class 2C2 solid particles Class solid particles Class solid particles Class 382 1S2 2S2 The drive must be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust Tested according to IEC 60721 3 3 mechanical conditions Class 3M4 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s According to ISTA 1A According to ISTA 1A Max 100 m s Max 100 m s 330 ft s 11 ms 330 ft s 11 ms Freefall Not allowed 76 cm 30 in 76 cm 30 in Materials Drive enclosure Package Disposal Technical data 317 e PC ABS 2 mm PC 10 GF 2 5 3 mm and PA66 25 GF 1 5 mm all in color NCS 1502 Y RAL 9002 PMS 420 C e hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers e extruded aluminium A
17. Planning the electrical installation 37 E Alternative power cable types Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below Motor cables Note A separate PE conductor is required recommended for input cables also if the conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient for the purpose Symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield PE Shield conductor Shield and shield PE Allowed as input cables Shield A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor PE PE E Motor cable shield To function as a protective conductor the shield must have the same cross sectional area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio frequency emissions the shield conductivity must be at least 1 10 of the phase conductor conductivity The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires The better and tighter the shield the lower the emission level and bearing currents Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core 38 Planning the electrical installation E Additional US requirements Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded p
18. The following tables describe the Status Word content for the DCU profile READY ENABLED STARTED RUNNING ZERO_SPEED ACCELERATE D DECELERATE Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value ie is within tolerance limits oc Drive has not reached setpoint LIMIT Operation is limited by group 20 LIMITS settings A Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits O All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV_REF A A M REV_AGT 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL LOCAL a 0 Controls notin contol panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL a 0 Controls notin fieldbus local made 14 EXT2_AGT a 0 _ Contiolis in Exi mode SSS 15 FAULT ia 0 _ Drive is notna autsa SSS 286 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU Profile Status Word parameter 0304 Bit Value Status 6 ALARM An alarm is on eee No alarms are on 17 NOTICE 1 Amaintenance requestis pending 0 No maintenance request DIRLOCK o DitectionockisOFF oo o o o LOCALLOCK o tocaimodelockiso lt GTL_MODE CO Drive is in scalar control mode REQ_OTL 0 Nooperation SSS S 0 Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus 0 Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus 29 REQ_REFZEXT External PID reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus 0 ACK_STARTINH Start inhibit from fieldbus 0 No
19. Vee BC voltage 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting E 3407 OUTPUT1 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting E 3408 SIGNAL2 Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control 104 PARAM panel in display mode See parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 101 178 Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 a O MIN XX Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting e 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting E 3411 OUTPUT2DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT FORM parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM PF Se See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 3404 See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM DSP FORM a OUTPUT2 Selects
20. closed closed Damper q status Damper Damper opening closing time time Run Enable signal rom the damper end switch when the damper is full opened 1601 Motor status Acceleration Deceleration time 2202 time 2203 NOT SEL Start Enable signal is on External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Start Enable If Start Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated pa EI CN CN O CA Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start Enable Start Disable signal ie control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 bit 19 for Start Enable 2 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 283 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 Start Enable If Start Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated 180 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2 DIN See selection ONY E DN See selection ONY E DIN See selection ONY E ENABLE 2 parameter 7608 START ENABLE 1 e parameter 1608 START ENABLET 1610 DISPLAY Activ
21. you can browse them in the Output mode To browse the signals forward press key CAS repeatedly To browse them backward press key Cv repeatedly Control panels 73 E Reference mode In the Reference mode you can e set the frequency reference e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the frequency reference Go to the Main menu by pressing ws if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing UZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing E The display briefly shows LoC before switching to local control Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key A 53 or SY until you see rEF and then press 37 Now the display shows the current reference value with under the value 4911 FWD e To increase the reference value press 45 e To decrease the reference value press Cv 5 Q O HZ The value changes immediately when you press the FWD key It is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 74 Control panels E Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can e view and change parameter values e select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode e start s
22. 21 227 7a foaxo5az2f s 130 95 92 264 90 2 ia foaxo7aa 2 eo 205 95 92 264 90 24 14 foaxoeas 2f 62 212 95 92 264 90 a 12 amel ero o2 ssa 14 sre 191 0 8 ossosa aso meo 294 ma srs 91 06 o ooma n 98 66 28 mee 88 xoma 18 s ss 23 244 8 foaxozae 4 21 72 98 33 2867 98 18 e xossa 31 106 98 33 2867 98 13 8 foaxoaas 4 40 137 98 33 287 98 13 8 foaxo6a2 4 61 208 98 33 267 98 19 1 foaxoeao 4 74 268 101 48 327 02 24 14 oacosara o4 s21 farf a era oa a foax tsas 4 130 a 120 a 312 107 52 31 oaza 178 509 120 a 312 107 52 31 roax sear 4 360 1195 334 na 578 197 96 57 foax atas4 440 1605 384 ma 578 197 96 57 roaxaeaa 4 530 1810 384 na 578 197 96 57 00578903 xls D Technical data 313 E Noise Frame Noise level size dBA 00578903 xls D Terminal and lead through data for the power cables Frame Max cable U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 PE size diameter for NEMA 1 U1 V1 W1 Max terminal size Tightening Max clamp size Tightening U2 V2 W2 flexible rigid torque solid or stranded torque mm AWG Nm Ibfin mm AWG Nm Ibfin ST R e os 4060 10 08 7 2 3 121 R 065 4060 10 08 7 2 3 121 rs 20 114 tooneo e 17 1 2 3 ra 00578903 xls D Termina
23. 3 1 1 t 3 1 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1405 RO 1 OFF Defines the release delay for relay output RO 0 0 s DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON 1 0 1s DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1408 RO3 ON See parameter 7404 RO 1 ON DELAY DELAY 1409 eee 3 OFF See PA aeRO 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY eee 1410 RELAY See parameter 7407 RELAY nailed 1 Available only if _ SEL OUTPUT 4 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 is connected to the drive 1413 RO 4 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0 s DELAY 1501 AO1 Connects a drive signal to analog output AO 103 CONTENT SEL X X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED Actual signals and parameters 175 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Defines the minimum value for signal selected with CONTENT MIN parameter 7507 AO1 CONTENT SEL AO minimum and maximum correspond the 1504 MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as follows AO mA AO mA 1505 1505 1502 1503 AO 1503 1502 AO content content KX Setting range depends on parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 1503 AO1 Defines the maximum value for signal selected with CONTENT parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL See the figure for MAX parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Kak 1
24. 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 76 8 kbit s 5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 8 NONE 2 8 EVEN 1 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL ABB DRV LIM Selects the communication PROFILE DCU PROFILE profile used by the drive See section Communication ABB DRV FULL profiles on page 278 5310 5317 EFB PAR 0 65535 Any Selects an actual value to be 10 17 mapped to Modbus register 400xx After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set the Drive control parameters on page 268 must be checked and adjusted when necessary Selects the parity setting The same settings must be used in all on line stations The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset 268 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Drive control parameters After the Modbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV 1001 EXT1 COMM Enables 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 40031 bits COMMANDS 0 1 START STOP when EXT1 i
25. Block D A 10 Jiuxiangiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Telephone 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 86 10 5821 7618 Internet www abb com
26. COAST FUNCTION Actual signals and parameters 153 Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Value Description Default 2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1 50s TIME 1 2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1 TIME 1 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro ABB MACRO a 9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage 9906 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current CURR 9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency E 50 0 Hz FREQ U 60 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed Type SPEED dependent 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power Pn POWER 154 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 10101 SPEED amp DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm A negative value indicates 1 1 rpm reverse direction 0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 0103 OUTPUT Calculated drive output frequency in Hz Shown by default 1 0 1 Hz FREQ on the panel Output mode display 0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A Shown by default on the 1 0 1A panel Output mode display 0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque in percent of the motor nominal 1 0 1 torque 0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW an 0 1 0107 DC BUS Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC 1 1V VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT Calculated motor voltage in V AC 1 1V VOLTAGE 0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGB
27. Display Go to the Main menu by pressing S if you are in the LOC WMAIN MENU 1 Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until you get to the Main menu Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS con the menu with keys 4 and SY 7 and pressing SS Select the I O group eg DIGITAL INPUTS with keys Ca and SY 7 and press After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the selection Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys 4 and SY 7 and press S Specify a new value for the setting with keys A gt and NS Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value e To save the new value press Jo cancel the new value and keep the original press jeg PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR _ EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC UL I O SETTINGS 1 DIGITAL INPUTS DI ANALOG INPUTS RELAY OUTPUTS va ANALOG OUTPUTS AOUT PANEL EXIT 00 00 SEL e SETTINGS 1 DI nue START STOP El DI DI3 EXIT 00 00 LOC U PAR EDIT 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UI O SETTINGS 1 A STOR El DI 1001 DIR E1 DI3 EXIT 00 00 Application macros 99 Application macros What this chapter contains The chapter describes
28. FORWARD Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled DI1P 2P 3 Pulse start through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start In order to 4 start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction through digital input DI3 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled KEYPAD Start stop and direction commands through control panel when EXT1 is active To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1F 2R Start stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 DI2 Operation PO 0 Stop A O Startfoward 0 1 Startreverse SS Parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P 3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start 5 forward Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2 O gt 1 Start reverse In order to start the drive digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 DI2 Pulse stop through digital input DI3 1 gt 0 Stop To control the direction parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST Note When the stop input DI3 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are
29. Plan the installation select the cables etc Planning the electrical installation on page 35 Check the ambient conditions ratings and Technical data on page 307 required cooling air flow Unpack and check the drive Mechanical installation Unpacking on page 31 If the drive will be connected to an IT Operation principle and hardware description ungrounded or corner grounded system Type designation key on page 27 check that the internal EMC filter is not Electrical installation Checking the connected compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems on page 46 Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet Mechanical installation on page 29 Route the cables Planning the electrical installation Routing the cables on page 39 Check the insulation of the input cable and the Electrical installation Checking the insulation motor and the motor cable of the assembly on page 45 Connect the power cables Electrical installation Connecting the power cables on page 47 Connect the control cables Electrical installation Connecting the control cables on page 49 Check the installation Installation checklist on page 55 Commission the drive Start up and control with I O on page 57 Operation principle and hardware description 23 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains The chapter briefly describes the operation principle layout type designation label and type desig
30. STOP TIME 1 4 e four start and stop days START DAY 1 4 STOP DAY 1 4 e four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1 4 together TIMED FUNC 1 4 e booster time an additional booster time connected to timed functions A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods TIME PERIOD 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 TIME PERIOD 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 TIMED FUNC 1 3608 START DAY 2 Bee CGAY 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC TIME PERIOD 3 SN laa 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 3610 START TIME 3 X 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 TIMED FUNC 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC TIME PERIOD 4 TIMED FUNC 4 3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 BOOSTER 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME 142 Program features A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one timed function at a time TIMED FUNC 1 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SE TIMED FUNC 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 1209 TIME MODE SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 4027 PID PARAM SET 4228 ACTIVATE E Example Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8 00 to 15 30 8 a m to 3 30 p m and on Sundays from 12 00 to 15 00 12 to 3 p m By pressing the extension time switch the air conditioning is on for an extra hour Par
31. active stop command before starting from the panel See section 3 wire macro on page 103 and parameters 7007 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 5014 Panel control is disabled Reset drive fault and retry because of drive fault 5015 Panel control is disabled Deactivate local control mode lock and retry because local control See parameter 7606 LOCAL LOCK mode lock is active 5018 Parameter default value is Contact your local ABB representative not found 5019 Writing non zero Only parameter reset is allowed parameter value is prohibited 5020 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group is hidden 5022 Parameter is write Parameter value is read only and cannot be protected changed 5023 Parameter change is not Stop drive and change parameter value allowed when drive is running 5024 Drive is executing task Wait until task is completed 5025 Software is being uploaded Wait until upload download is complete or downloaded 5026 Value is at or below Contact your local ABB representative minimum limit 5027 Value is at or above Contact your local ABB representative maximum limit 5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 293 ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5030 Invalid request Contact Contact your local ABB
32. commands are received through fieldbus communication Actual signals and parameters 177 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 Reset through inverted digital input DI1 reset on the falling 1 edge of DI1 or by control panel Dia DIS See selection DIN o H oam See selection nany CO DBn See selection DHUNV 1605 USER PAR Enables the change of the User Parameter Set through a SET CHG digital input See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped During the change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set by parameter 9902 after changing any parameter setting or reperforming the motor identification The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed Any unsaved changes will be lost Note The value of this parameter is not included in the User Parameter Sets A setting once made remains despite User Parameter Set change Note Selection of User Parameter Set
33. e Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 110 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL e Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above e Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 96 Control panels How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above A MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing Dl if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly ES until you get to the Main menu Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys As and SY 7 and pressing e To copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup menu with keys CA and vy_ and press During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press EP if you want to stop the operation After the upload is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press y to return to the Par Backup menu To perform downloads select the appropriate operat
34. gt lon Al Current 1 1 01A 1 01A 1A 2005 OVERVOLT Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the ENABLE CTRL intermediate DC link Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated oe 4 ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 2006 UNDERVOLT _ Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the ENABLE intermediate DC link TIME If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor speed the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan See section Power loss ride through on page 125 DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated io ENABLE TIME Undervoltage control activated The undervoltage control is 1 active for 500 ms ENABLE Undervoltage control activated No operation time limit All parameters No Name Value 2007 MINIMUM FREQ Actual signals and parameters 183 Description Def FbEq Defines the minimum limit
35. module manual 298 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 SW 0038 0039 0040 EFB 1 FF92 0307 bit O EFB 2 FF93 0307 bit 1 EFB 3 FF94 0307 bit 2 MOTOR PHASE FF56 0306 bit 14 OUTP WIRING FF95 0306 bit 15 programmable fault function 3023 INCOMPATIBLE 630F 0307 bit 3 USER LOAD CURVE FF6B 0307 bit 4 UNKNOWN EXTENSION 7086 0307 bit 5 INLET VERY LOW 8A81 0307 bit 6 Error from the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application The meaning is protocol dependent Motor circuit fault due to missing motor phase or motor thermistor relay used in motor temperature measurement fault Incorrect input power and motor cable connection ie input power cable is connected to drive motor connection The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and the motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT Loaded software is not compatible Condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Option module not supported by the drive firmware is connected to the drive Pressure at pump fan inlet too low See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265 Check motor and motor cable Check motor thermistor relay if used Check input power con
36. oooccccio mia ra Cease ean o ae 45 Checking the insulation of the assembly 0 000 ees 45 IVS ee ae he Be eee ee Guede ee ee ee ee ee Re A ee Gee 45 input power Cable 2 044044 4044828 8sb oe be See tees heer see bonkers andes Chee as 45 Motor and motor cable 0 0 cc eee eens 46 Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems 46 Connecting the power Cables 0 ccc eet ee eee eee eens 47 Connection GHAI essesi si tiara Wiebe see Head ech Se ee ok foe Heed He a ae we ce i 47 Connection procedure escojo cna cede ad esh ee EErEE EEN de Ge Sees es 48 Connecting the Control cables socorrista dhe See wed Pea Chee eS 49 OASIS 2 ot bk ace Bak Bae ae ee re ee ina a te eee eae ene daa 49 Default I O connection diagram 0 0 eee eee 52 Connection procedure o 53 Connecting the embedded fieldbus 0 0 ccc eee ee eee ens 54 CORNECUONCIAGI AM acuda ds cbt he deed RA a Renee Cee es 54 7 Installation checklist CHECKING the installation saseasca eek he ariel ir a ia a ae eae hes Ew ee oa a 55 8 Start up and control with I O What this chapter contains 0242 44 0440s 86608844 OCs eee ee eee ee bade de ena eas 57 Table of contents 7 FIOW 16 start up ING CHIVES ss sas Gerad ad bard eek kd ee eke ne eee bee eke ee ee ees 57 How to start up the drive without a control panel o o o ooooooooooooo 58 How to perform a manual start up
37. parameter 1401 RELAY OVER OUTPUT 1 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION DRIVE START Trigger when the drive receives a start command TIMER TRIG Pump cleaning sequence is started periodically at intervals 14 defined by parameter 4607 TRIG TIME DI1 INV Trigger on the falling edge of digital input D11 Actual signals and parameters 237 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DIAN See selection ONY A aa See selection DN 8 DI1 INV S10 Enable on the ins TE of digital input DI1 trigger on SUPRV1 OVER parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION DI2 INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 8 DI3 INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 E DI4 INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 DI5 INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 4602 FWD STEP Defines the forward step frequency for the pump cleaning 0 0 sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 0 0 100 0 Forward step frequency 1 0 1 4603 REV STEP Defines the reverse step frequency for the pump cleaning 0 0 sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 0 0 100 0 Reverse step frequency 1 0 1 4604 OFF TIME Defines the length of the interval between forward and 0 0s reverse steps in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0s Off time step interval 4605 FWD TIME Defines the duration of each forward step in the pump 0 0s cleaning sequence in secon
38. the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function e Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted 5 Up e Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display e Increments a value if a parameter is selected Holding the key down changes the value faster e Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 7 LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information e Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display e Decrements a value if a parameter is selected displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control 80 Control panels Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC Y LOC UMAIN MENU 1 10 4 OZ 4 No Field_____ Alternatives Significance 1 Control location LOC Drive control is local that is from the control panel Drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 2 State W Forward shaft direction So Reverseshaftdirection REM Y Y Rotating a
39. 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to DI1 and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01 30 00 the booster is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is deactivated Booster active aA lt X A Booster time SRC function can consist of 0 4 time periods and a booster 2 S cn A od 2 o o 212 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq T2473 v4 TATA 10 era time pefiods and3 O mesma Time periods 1 3 and 4 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC a SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Le 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC a SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC a 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC IN SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Actual signals and parameters 213 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3701 USER LOAD C Defines supervision mode for the user adjustable load NOT SEL curve Motor torque Overload area 3706 3709 3712 3715 3714 Allowed operating area Underload area 3704 3707 3710 3713 3716 Output frequency Hz NOT SEL Supervision not active oe 4 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the u
40. 1 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See the figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8772 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency increases 1 On Note 8709 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 f Hz 8109 1 8109 8112 MIN 0 500 042 Frequency O Actual signals and parameters 245 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8110 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary 2 motor See 8709 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U 60 0 Hz of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if e one auxiliary motor is running e drive output frequency exceeds limit 8770 1 Hz e output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8770 1 Hz for at least time 8775 AUX MOT START D 005000 Hz Frequeney O 8111 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary 3 motor See 8709 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U 60 0 Hz of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if e two auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency exceeds limit 8111 1 Hz e output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8777 1 Hz for at least time 8775 AUX MOT START D G0 5000H2 Frequenoy O 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the freque
41. 1 OUTLET VERY HIGH Bit 2 15 Reserved 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault See chapter Fault tracing on page 1 1 287 for the codes 0 Fault history is clear on panel display NO RECORD 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred 1 1 Format Date if the real time clock is operating The days number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred Format on the assistant panel Real time hh mm ss if the real time clock is operating Time elapsed after the power on hh mm ss minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the basic panel Time elapsed after power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 30 ticks 60 seconds Eg Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1 Hz 0406 VOLTAGE AT Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest 1 0 1V FLT fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1A FLT 160 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0408 n AT Motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque atthe 1 0 1
42. 13 Diz Hand 0 PID 1 control selection 14 Dis Constant speed 1 parameter 1202 fis o4 Runenable oo hos stop 0 stat e1D Tr rr Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 19 RONO_ ee 221 pour ty 22 DOGND Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 1 Hand 0 10 V gt speed reference 3 The signal source must be powered PID 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 108 Application macros PFC Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 7 PFC CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 151 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A eft sen Sina cab sieneen z 4 10 eternos volage 10 VDC max mA D gt n2 Process actual value 4 20mA7 IT fete Analog input arut common 7 ao Output frequency value 0 20mA A e enD Analog output circuit common 9 2260 Anan volage output 24 V DO max 200 mA ofono Auxil
43. 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO50 40 50 distribution TA O OT 6429 AL2RANGE50 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO60 50 60 distribution 00 400 O VELL 6430 AL2ZRANGE60 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO7O 60 70 distribution TA O VELA 6431 AL2RANGE7O Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO80 70 80 distribution TATI O TT 6432 AL2RANGE80 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO90 80 90 distribution 00 400 O VELL 6433 AL2RANGE9O Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO 90 100 distribution 00 1000 1 PFC Ol no Fan Contro me oF Or 8103 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Example The drive operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe Parameter 4077 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match th
44. 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased by 1 for every additional 1 C 1 8 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 hy Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 2000 m 3300 6600 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft Switching frequency derating Derate according to the switching frequency used see parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ as follows Switching Drive voltage rating LRA Uy 200 240 V Un 380 480 V AKHz No derating No derating BkKHz Derate gt y to 90 Derate loy to 75 for RO or to 80 for R1 R4 Derate gt y to 80 Derate 5 to 50 for RO or to 65 for R1 R4 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F Derate ly to 75 Derate I gt to 50 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F 310 Technical data Power cable sizes and fuses Cable dimensioning for rated currents 4y is shown in the table below together with the corresponding fuse types for short circuit protection of the input power cable The rated fuse currents given in the table are the maxima for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the rate
45. 4410 Al MEAS Selects the analog input for pump fan outlet pressure NOT SEL OUTLET supervision NOT SEL No analog input selected Oo Pump fan outlet pressure monitored through analog input Al Az Ses selection AM 4411 Al OUT HI Sets the supervision limit for the primary outlet pressure 100 00 LEVEL measurement lf the value of the selected analog input exceeds this limit the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set with parameter 44715 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 4412 VERY HIGH Enables and selects the mode of the secondary outlet NOT SEL CTRL pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4410 Al MEAS OUTLET NOT SEL Secondary outlet pressure monitoring not used Oo STOP Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive The 1 drive will start again if the pressure falls below the supervision level FAULT Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4413 Al OUT VERY Supervision level for secondary outlet pressure monitoring 100 00 HIGH function See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 Actual signals and parameters 233 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4414 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL OUTLET at the pump fan outlet The normal state is 1 active If the sele
46. 44719 PROFILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves 1 CONTROL Signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to 2 DEV2 parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves APPL OUTPUT Signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT is monitored and 100 0 compared to parameter 4479 PROFILE OUTP LIM The signal constantly remaining at 100 may indicate a leak in the output piping 4419 PROFILE Supervision limit for the Application Profile protection OUTP LIM 234 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description a 500 0 500 0 Supervision limit Supervision limit 0 1 0 1 4420 PROF LIMIT Delay time for the Application Profile protection a 00h ON DLY 0 00 100 00 h Delay time 0 01h 4421 PIPEFILL Enables the Precharge function which calculates reference NOT SEL ENABLE steps NOT SEL Not enabled C When DI1 is active 1 Precharge function is active when the drive is started If DI1 becomes inactive 0 before Precharge is finished normal PID control is enabled o fesen ooo DIS ACTIVE DI1 INV When DI1 is inactive 0 pa function is active when the drive is started If DI1 becomes active 1 before oanade is finished normal PID control is enabled
47. ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 Run Enable If Run Enable signal is switched on the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running LOCK parameter changing from control panel Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 7603 PASS CODE The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by macros or fieldbus OPEN The lock is open Parameter values can be changed NOT SAVED Parameter changes made by control panel are not stored 2 into the permanent memory To store changed parameter values set parameter 7607 PARAM SAVE value to SAVE 1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock see parameter 7602 PARAMETER LOCK ee 65535 Pass code ioe 358 opens the lock The value reverts M to 0 ioe 1604 FAULT RESET Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal a SEL resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists KEYPAD Fault reset only from the control panel 0 DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 reset on the rising edge of 1 DI1 or by control panel D2 See selection DIT o See selection DIT E See selection DI1 t DB See selection DI1 START STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input or by control panel Note Do not use this option when start stop and direction
48. AO signal scaling 1503 lt 1502 122 Program features Programmable digital inputs The drive has five programmable digital inputs The update time for the digital inputs is 2 ms It is possible to delay the state change of digital inputs with delays defined in group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT This enables very simple program sequences by connecting several functions with the same physical wire eg to remove branches and leaves from a pipe by running the fan in reverse before normal operation One digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 123 E Settings Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS Dl as external Run Enable fault reset or user macro change signal Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Delays in DI state changes 2109 DI as external emergency stop command source 2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal ZII Dl as zero ramp Dl as zero ramp force signal Dl as zero ramp force signal 4406 4414 Dl as connection signal source for pump inlet outlet pressure switch Program features 123 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0160 DI status 0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred Programmable relay output The drive has one programmable relay output It is possible to add three additional relay outputs with the optional Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 For more information see MREL 01 Relay Output Extension
49. Before loading check that the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S2 Save User 2 macro Stores the current parameter settings 3 SAVE and the motor model 115 345 V 200 V units 200 600 V 400 V E units 230 690 V 400 V U units motor with a voltage greater than the input power voltage Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal motor voltage but increased linearly up to value of the input voltage Output voltage Input voltage 9905 Output frequency 9907 WARNING Never connect a motor to a drive which is connected to power line with voltage level higher than the rated motor voltage Voltage Note The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive supply voltage This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive Actual signals and parameters 263 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency ie the frequency at FREQ which the output voltage equals the motor nominal voltage Field weakening point Nom frequency Supply voltage Motor nom voltage 10 0 500 0 Hz Frequeney OA 9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed Must be equal to the Type SPEED value on the motor rating plate dependent 50 18000 rpm 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the
50. DCU Profile Control Word parameter 0301 Bn hame 0 miomo OO e pue IN_O Force ell input to zero Reoperation OOOO is LOCALLOC A gt local lock Entering the local control mode is a Enel key of the panel o No operation OS SSS SS EN Reserved DCU PROFILE Control Word parameter 0302 Bit Name Value information Ooo o O 16 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control Word requested Example If the drive is in remote control and the start stop direction command source is DI for external control location 1 EXT1 by setting bit 16 to value 1 the start stop direction is controlled by the fieldbus command word CN No fieldbus local mode FBLOCAL_REF Fieldbus local mode Control Word for reference requested See example in bit 16 FBLOCAL_CTL o No fieldbus local mode START_DISABLE1 E No Start Enable Enable start Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM START_DISABLE2 No Start Enable Enable start Effective if parameter 7609 setting is COMM ae _CONST Constant speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision Reoperation OOO REF AVE Average speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision Reoperation LINK_ON Master detected on fieldbus link This is an internal control bit Only for supervision 0 Fieldbus link is down li STARTINH 1o o Start inhibit O No start inhibit a Reserved Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 285
51. Diagnostics Actual signals Additional information 0111 0112 EXT1 EXT2 reference E Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for external control location EXT1 DI DI1 DI5 EXT1 DI5 C atop Fieldbus selection irection See chapter COMM Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 1001 on page 265 Control panel KEYPAD imed andion TIMED FUNC 1 4 E Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1 Select Alt Al1 Al2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Al2 EXT1 DI3 N Reference REF1 DI4 Fieldbus selection Hz rpm DI5 See chapter l COMM Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 1103 on page 265 FREQ INPUT Frequency input KEYPAD Control panel 118 Program features Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog input and control panel signals e The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the speed the other decreases it e The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using mathematical functions Addition subtraction multiplication and division e The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and
52. Module User s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through the relay output Ready running fault alarm etc The update time for the relay output is 2 ms A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link E Settings Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0184 RO Control Word through fieldbus control 0134 0162 RO 1 status 0173 RO 2 4 status With option MREL 01 only Frequency input Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input Frequency input 0 16000 Hz can be used as external reference signal source The update time for the frequency input is 50 ms Update time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 50 ms gt 2 ms E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 78 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and filtering 1103 1106 External reference REF 1 2 through frequency input 4010 4110 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source 124 Program features E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0161 Frequency input value Transistor output The drive has one programmable transistor output The output can be used either as digital output or frequency output 0 16000 Hz The update time for the transistor fre
53. Name Value Description Def FbEq PFC with Autochange mode All parameters No Name Value Actual signals and parameters 249 Description The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter Parameter setting Relay assignment HANAH Autochange disabled 1 A aeee Ea Ax A a X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV gt 0 Parameter setting Relay assignment Autochange enabled ATA PES Pre Saca pro PFC Pre No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control Def FbEq 250 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8118 AUTOCHNG Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the NOT SEL INTERV interval between changes The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8779 A
54. PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays ES DI4 Free ME Speed reg motor 1 Not allowed juin DI4 Free DI5 First PFC relay Not allowed Not allowed Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled NO Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications fout MAX 8110 8109 8113 8112 MIN pt A gt B gt C A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running 258 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Example In the diagram below the pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A Con i 3 tactors Enables Regulator by pass control The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference input Normally 1106 REF2 SELECT is used as the PFC reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC frequency reference The first figure for parameter 8121 shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system 8122 PFC START Sets the start delay fo
55. See parameter 2503 2503 1 0 1 Hz 1 Hz 2506 au SPEED 3 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI HI 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 1 0 1 Hz JIN tr 110 2603 IR COMP Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed IR Type VOLT compensation The function is useful in applications with dependent high break away torque when vector control cannot be applied To prevent overheating set IR compensation voltage as low as possible The figure below illustrates the IR compensation a IR compensation values Pu kW 0 37 0 75 2 2 4 0 7 5 200 240 V units 200 240 Vans aM 380 480Vuniis 380 480 V units Motor voltage A IR compensated B No compensation 0 0 100 0V Voltage boost 1 0 1V 2604 IR COMP Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V 80 FREQ See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Note If parameter 2605 U F RATIO is set to USER DEFINED this parameter is not active The IR compensation frequency is set by parameter 2670 USER DEFINED U1 0 100 Value in percent of the motor frequency Actual signals and parameters 191 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2605 U F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency U f ratio below the field SQUARE weakening point D LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque applications SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifug
56. Stop 0 Start 1 Hand 13 DI2 Hana 0 PIDIPFC 1 control selection 14DI3__ Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive 15 DI4__ Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor 16 D5 Stop 0 Start 1 PIDIPFC X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 1e ronc PFC e herono ho posre S Pre 22 DOGND Digital output max 100 mA Hand 0 10 V gt 0 50 Hz 6 The signal source must be powered PID PFC 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 5 360 degree grounding under a clamp 110 Application macros User macros In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to create two user macros The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user macro but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1 The procedure for the User macro 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To create User macro 1 e Adjust the parameters e Save the parameter settings to the permanent memory by changing para
57. a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions Addition and multiplication e The drive reference can be given with frequency input It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source type and scaling Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Speed reference acceleration deceleration ramps Group 32 SUPERVISION E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 REF1 REF2 reference Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference processing chain Program features 119 Reference trimming In reference trimming the external reference is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable The block diagram below illustrates the function Select 1105 REF1 MAX DIRECT 2 1108 REF 2 MAX 2 REF 1 Hz rpm REF2 4232 CORRECTION SRC REF 1 Hz rpm REF2 The drive reference before trimming REF The drive reference after trimming max freq par 2008 or 2007 if the absolute value is greater PID2 ref par 4210 PID2 act par 4214 4221 1 REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active See parameter 1702 2 When par 4232 PID2REF the maximum trimming r
58. and install the drive mechanically Checking the installation site The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet Check the enclosure requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations see chapter Technical data on page 307 The drive can be installed in three different ways depending on the frame size a back mounting all frame sizes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 c DIN rail mounting all frame sizes The drive must be installed in an upright position Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to chapter Dimensions on page 323 for frame details E Requirements for the installation site Operation conditions See chapter Technical data on page 307 for the allowed operation conditions of the drive Wall The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible of non flammable material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive 30 Mechanical installation Floor The floor material below the installation should be non flammable Free space around the drive The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm 3 in No free space is required on the sides of the drive so drives can be installed side by side Required tools To install the drive you need the following tools screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure drill if the drive will be installed
59. and a fault indication is given E Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given E Supply phase loss If the drive detects supply phase loss excessive DC voltage ripple the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits The drive has adjustable limits for output frequency current maximum and DC voltage E Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS 132 Program features Power limit Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values see chapter Technical data on page 307 Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below a minimum faults The Automatic Resets must be activated by the user E Settings Parameter Additional information 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings E Diagnostics Alarm Additional information AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision status can be indicated through relay or digital output The supervision function outputs can be used for tr
60. as such without correction When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AIT1 the fieldbus reference is corrected using analog input Al1 as shown in the following examples Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COMM COMM MAX MIN MIN COMM MAX MIN MIN Al1 Al 50 MAX MIN Al 50 MAX MIN Corrected reference HZ o COMM Max limit REF 100 50 ai Min limit Min limit 0 0 50 100 COMM 0 REF 1 Corrected reference Hz Corrected reference Hz COMM REF 100 50 0 Min limit Max limit Min limit 0 COMM 0 50 100 REF Corrected reference Hz Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1708 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN 272 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COMM COMM Al 50 MAX MIN COMM Al 50 MAX MIN A11 MIN MIN Corrected reference Hz COMM Max limit REF 100 50 0 me ra lirai 0 Min limit e 0 Alf 50 Min limit Max limit Corrected reference Hz Corrected reference Hz COMM REF 100 50 0 Max limit Min limit P 9 ig Min limit Max limit A750 COMM Corrected reference Hz Maximum limit is defined by parameter 7705 REF1 MAX 1708
61. by Direction determined by digital the sign of COMM command eg digital input control panel par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 REF 1 2 FORWARD Fieldbus Fieldbus Ref 1 2 100 10 Ref 1 2 163 Max ref par 1003 Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 Restant REVERSE Max Ref 163 Fieldbus 100 Fieldbus ref 1 2 ref 1 2 Max Ref Max Ref par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 REF 1 2 REQUEST Direction Command Max ref Max ref FORWARD Fieldbus ref 1 2 100 163 163 Fieldbus 100 ref 1 2 Max ref Max ref Direction Command REVERSE E Actual value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depend on the selected function See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 149 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 275 Modbus mapping The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive Laima Sr Additional information anima e a Reads the contents of registers in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Read Multiple Holding Registers Write Single Holding Register Writes to a single register in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers port must be initialized and restarted and all of its communication event counters cleared If the port is cu
62. conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends Route the motor cable input power cable and control cables separately For more information see section Routing the cables on page 39 Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end For minimum radio frequency interference e ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows flattened width gt 1 5 length e or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead through of the motor terminal box 48 Electrical installation E Connection procedure 1 Fasten the grounding conductor PE of the input power cable under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U1 V1 and W1 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 Nem 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 2 Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U2 V2 and W2 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 lbf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 3 Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically Electrical installation 49 Connecting the control cables E 1 0 terminals The figure below shows th
63. copy of the Control Word in hexadecimal format 40005 Actual 1 8 Actual value 1 8 Use parameter 5310 5317 to fee selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus 40012 register 40005 40012 4 the DCU profile 32 bit Control Word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40032 Control Word MSW R W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control Word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB 4 0031 Control Word LSW R W 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 ie the least significant word of CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 0033 Status Word LSW 0303 FB STS WORD 1 ie the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status Word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 0304 FB STS WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status Word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40034 ACS310 STATUS Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile ie modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all changed values Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 277 E Function codes Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register are Code Function name _ Additional information Hex dec 03 Read 4X Register Reads the binary contents of reg
64. default signals select up to three signals from group 07 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value O means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3417 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT Control panels 87 Display LOC U PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR EDIT 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM OUTPUT FREQ 103 FRET 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM CURRENT 104 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM TORQUE 105 CANCE
65. disabled 162 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop commands ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 0 1 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 283 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start stop control Timed function 1 active start timed function 1 inactive stop See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start 0 Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI5 4 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI4 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be REQUEST SUPRV1 Start when the value of supervision parameter 1 goes over 27 OVER the supervision high limit Stop when the value goes below the low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 Start when the value of the supervision parameter 1 goes 28 UNDER below the low limit Stop when the value goes over the high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 29 OVER SUPRV2 See
66. does NOT e generate an emergency stop of the motor e separate the drive from dangerous potential NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected DI1 Digital input DI1 1 stop along the emergency stop ramp 1 See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 emergency stop command reset See selection DI1 See selection DI1 5 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI O stop along the emergency stop 1 ramp See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 1 emergency stop command reset DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DIS5 INV See selection DI1 INV 2110 TORQ BOOST Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost 100 CURR See parameter 2707 START FUNCTION 15 300 Value in percent 186 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2112 ZERO SPEED Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function The 0 0s function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed controller Speed controller switched off Motor remains live Motor is coasts to stop decelerated to true O Zero Speed No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller
67. drilling does not enter the drive during the installation With screws 1 Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the package The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter Dimensions on page 323 The number and location of the holes used depend on how the drive is installed a back mounting frame sizes RO R4 four holes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 three holes one of the bottom holes is located in the clamping plate 2 Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations Mechanical installation 33 3 Position the drive onto the screws on the wall 4 Tighten the screws in the wall securely On DIN rail 1 Click the drive to the rail To detach the drive press the release lever on top of the drive 1b 34 Mechanical installation E Fasten clamping plates 1 Fasten the clamping plate to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided screws 2 For frame sizes RO R2 fasten the I O clamping plate to the clamping plate with the provided screws Planning the electrical installation 35 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the compatibility of the motor and drive and selecting cables protections cable routing and way of operation for the drive Note The installation must alw
68. hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option 3 Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with eg a screwdriver and lift the hinged fan holder slightly upward from its front edge 4 Free the fan cable from the clip in the fan holder Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 305 6 Remove the fan from the holder 7 Install the new fan in reverse order 8 Restore power Capacitors Reforming the capacitors The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year See section Type designation label on page 26 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the serial number For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 and ACS ACH550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to http www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Power connections A WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Check the tightness of the power cable connections Use the tightening torques given in section Terminal and lead through data for the power cables on page 313 3
69. limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Value of supervised parameter HI par 3203 LO par 3202 t of Case A Energized 1 0 t Case B Energized 1 0 t Actual signals and parameters 201 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Example 2 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO gt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO making it the active limit The new limit remains active until the supervised signal drops below the lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI making it the active limit Case A 1407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal exceeds the active limit Case B 1407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 UNDER Relay is de energized whenever the supervised signal drops below the active limit Value of supervised parameter Active limit HI par 3203 LO par 3202 Case A Energized 1 4 0 t Case B Lo E Energized 1 C C C 0 t Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 0 not selected 0 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit xX H XX Setting range depends on parameter 3201 setting X 3203 SUPERV 1 LI
70. ocation for drive has check control panel connector ceased l T Refit control panel in mounting communicating platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Alarm limit is 120 C Check ambient conditions See also section Derating on page 309 Check air flow and fan operation Check motor power against unit power ALARM LIMIT 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in 0308 bit 11 stall region due to eg excessive load or de li fault insufficient motor power 3010 3012 o AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 31 0308 bit 12 AUTOMATIC RESET settings 2014 AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange See parameter group 81 PFC 1 0308 bit 13 function is active CONTROL section PFC Control macro on page 108 and section SPFC Control macro on page 109 Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters 2015 PFCILOCK PFC interlocks are 0308 bit 14 active Drive cannot start e any motor when Autochange is used e the speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used See parameter group 87 PFC CONTROL PID SLEEP Sleep function has 0309 bit 1 entered sleeping mode See parameter gro
71. or EXT2 EXT1 EXT1 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1 SELECT EXT2 EXT2 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2 SELECT COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1 EXT2 selection ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 with ABB Drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 Timed EXT1 EXT2 control selection Timed function 1 active EXT2 timed function 1 inactive EXT1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS onin inverted digital input D11 1 EXT O EXT2 DIAN See selection IVINS DIS INV See selection DON f DIS INV See selection DI INY H 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 See Al1 section Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 on page 117 KEYPAD Control panel Al1 Analog input Al1 Al2 Analog input Al2 10 NO 164 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Al1 JOYST Analog input Al1 as joystick The minimum input signal runs 3 the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the for
72. parameter on the list with keys 45 oC UPAR EDIT and vw The value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press 3 to modify the value 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys CA5 LOC PAR EDIT and SY 7 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the HZ value Holding the key down changes the value faster j Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE To accept the new value press If the new value LOC CHANGED PAR is the default value the parameter is removed from the 02 CONST SPEED list of changed parameters A AA e To cancel the new value and keep the original press 1204 CONST SPEED 3 CANCEL 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT 92 Control panels E Fault Logger mode In the Fault Logger mode you can e view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory e see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory e read the help text for the fault e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Display Go to the Main menu by pressing ul if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until INT you get to
73. relay DI5 Free DI5 Free 2 DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DIS First PFC relay DI4 Second PFC relay DI5 Third PFC relay Not allowed Not allowed Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed reg motor DI5 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed reg motor DI4 First PFC relay DI5 First PFC relay DI5 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC relay DI5 Second PFC relay 3 5 Not allowed Not allowed All parameters No Name Value DI5 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL Actual signals and parameters 257 Description Def FbEq Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 5 starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31
74. representative local ABB Contact your local ABB representative gt Drive is not ready for Check input power supply operation eg due to low DC voltage 5032 Contact your local ABB representative 5040 Parameter download error Selected parameter setis Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 5041 Parameter backup file Contact your local ABB representative does not fit into memory 5042 Parameter download error Selected parameter setis Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 5044 Parameter backup file Check that file is compatible with drive restoring error 5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload 5051 Contact your local ABB representative 5052 Parameter upload has Retry parameter upload failed 5060 Parameter download Retry parameter download aborted 5062 Parameter download has Retry parameter download failed 5070 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative write error 5071 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative read error 5080 Operation is not allowed Switch to local control mode because drive is not in local control mode Operation is not allowed A E cause of fault and reset fault a ee of active fault 5083 Operation is not allowed hule parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK ane parameter lock is setting 5084 Onavalion is not allowed Wait until task is compl
75. selected O on Di2 a x 015 sesioni CI 4407 INLET CTRL _ Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 60 0s DLY 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of low inlet pressure 0 1 1800 0s Delay time This reference is used after detection of low inlet pressure FORCED REF See parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference 010 100 0 Forcedreference oon 4409 OUTLET PROT Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision NOT SEL E of pump fan outlet pressure Note Outlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL Primary outlet pressure supervision not used ALARM Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the 1 control panel display 232 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PROTECT Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the 2 control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4416 OUTLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently falls below the supervision level The following diagram describes the outlet pressure supervision function Measured outlet pressure PFC reference EXT 2 t FAULT Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 3
76. source selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred during the trial time defined by parameter 3702 Last fault is reset only if the number defined by parameter 3707 is 3 or more Trial time X Automatic reset Number of the automatic resets 1 1 3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See 130 0 s parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS 1050003 3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset See parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS If delay time is set to zero the drive resets immediately 00 12005 Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the OVERCURRE _ overcurrent fault Automatically resets the fault NT OVERCURRENT after the delay set by parameter 3703 DELAY TIME DISABLE macte O O OOOO O O o ENABLE 3105 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE OVERVOLTAG intermediate link overvoltage fault Automatically resets the E fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE macte O OOOO O O o ENABLE 3106 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE UNDERVOLTA intermediate link undervoltage fault Automatically resets GE the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE inactive OOOO ooo 200 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def
77. the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOC FAU 5 LOS LOGGER on the menu with keys lt An and SY 7 and PANE pressing ae The display shows the fault log starting gt 19 03 05 E 04 gt with the latest fault o A The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in EXIT 00 00 DETAIL chapter Fault tracing on page 287 To see the details of a fault select it with keys 4 gt and Loc PANEL LOSS Cv 7 and press Sy es FAULT TIME 1 13 04 57 FAULT TIME 2 EXIT 00 00 DIAG To show the help text press ul Scroll the help text with Loc DIAGNOSTICS keys CA and SY 7 Check comm lines After reading the help press SS to return to the O revious displa arameters in groups j a ity and 11 P EXIT 00 00 Control panels 93 E Time and Date mode In the Time and Date mode you can e show or hide the clock e change date and time display formats e setthe date and time e enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable cloc
78. the motor nameplate Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys lt a N SAVE gt and press 7 to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant EXIT Note At any time if you press 7 the Start up Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode O The basic start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and continue with the application set up as suggested by the Start up Assistant REM UCHOICE Do you want to use the start up assistant No EXIT 00 00 OK REM UCHOICE Show start up assistant _on next boot No EXIT 00 00 OK REM UPAR EDIT 9901 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 0 re 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 SAVE REM CHOICE SLI setup SK1p EXIT 00 00 OK Start up and control with l O 63 Select the application macro according to which the control cables are connected Continue with the application set up After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant suggests the next one Press 3 when is highlighted to continue with the suggested task Press key SY to highlight and then press lt to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press to stop the Start up Assistant Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pre
79. the same question about the next assistant and so on 90 Control panels Display e To specify a new value press keys 4 and SY 7 LOC UPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 SAVE e To ask for information on the requested parameter LOC U HELP press key 2 Scroll the help text with keys a and Set as given on the v_ Close the help by pressing wa Voltage va Lara correspond to motor D Y connection EXIT 00 00 e To accept the new value and continue to the setting of LOC OPAR EDIT the next parameter press 9906 MOTOR _ NOM CURR e To stop the assistant press ag EXIT 00 00 SAVE Control panels 91 E Changed Parameters mode In the Changed Parameters mode you can e view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values e change these parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Display Go to the Main menu by pressing SS if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until NY ETERS you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting LOC CHANGED PAR CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys As and SY 7 02 CONST SPEED 10 0 HZ and pressing lt 03 CONST SPEED 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the changed
80. the status line switch to local control by pressing E The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control e To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display press lt 45 The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off e To decrease the value press Vv If you are not in the Output mode press wa repeatedly until you get there e To increase the contrast press keys SI and aS simultaneously e To decrease the contrast press keys Sul and Kv simultaneously 00 00 MENU 86 Control panels E Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can e view and change parameter values e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Display Go to the Main menu by pressing ul if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until PIJN ETERS you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS Loc UPAR GROUPS 01 on the menu with keys CA 53 and SY 7 and pressing Ol OPERATING DATA ENTER 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT E
81. the time for the stall function See parameter 3010 20 s STALL FUNCTION 104005 3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth ground fault is ENABLE detected in the motor or the motor cable Note Changing this parameter setting is not recommended DISABLE No action O O o boo o ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 3018 COMM FAULT Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication NOT SEL FUNC break The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT Protection is active The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR 1 and coasts to stops CONST SP7 Protection is active The drive generates alarm IO COMM and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 7208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break LAST SPEED Protection is active The drive generates alarm IO COMM and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break 3019 COMM FAULT Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 3 0 s TIM supervision See parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 0 600 0 s Delay time 0 1s 3021 Al1 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al1 If parameter 3007 0 1 LIMIT AI lt MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT t
82. time the latest fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest FLT fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 2nd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing 1 1 FAULT 1 on page 287 for the codes 0413 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 3rd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing 1 1 FAULT 2 on page 287 for the codes 0414 DI 1 5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1 5 at the time the latest fault occurred binary Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off Actual signals and parameters 161 All parameters All parameters No Name Value peli melee 1001 EXT1 Defines the connections and the source for the start a DI1 2 COMMANDS land direction commands for external control location 1 EXT1 NOT SEL No start stop and direction command source ae and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 7003 DIRECTION O Beak REQUEST FORWARD Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P Pulse start through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start In order to 3 start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST
83. to other equipment or e the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I O terminals 140 Program features It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and a thermistor relay between the 24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a digital input The figure below displays the connection Par 3501 THERM 0 or THERM 1 Thermistor WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement the other I O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input E Settings 13 ANALOG INPUTS 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected E Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0145 Motor temperature Alarm Fault Additional information MOTOR TEMP MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp Program features 141 Timed functions A variety of drive functions can be time controlled eg start stop and EXT1 EXT2 control The drive offers e four start and stop times START TIME 1 4
84. use the rule of thumb Motor thermal time 35 t6 t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Motor load Temp rise 100 63 Par 3006 256 9999 196 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3007 MOT LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 100 CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ With the default value 100 motor overload protection is functioning when the constant current exceeds 127 of the parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 C 86 F ambient temperature and below 1000 m 3300 ft altitude When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F or the installation altitude is over 1000 m 3300 ft decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation Example If the constant protection level needs to be 115 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 91 115 127 100 Output current relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 Par 3007 100 127 Par 3008 50 Par 3009 50 150 Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor 1 1 current
85. used with other circuit breakers Contact your local ABB representative for the approved breaker types and supply network characteristics WARNING Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers independent of the manufacturer hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short circuit To ensure safe use special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers Follow the manufacturer s instructions E Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional protection devices are needed 42 Planning the electrical installation E Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional thermal protection devices are needed WARNING If the drive is connected to multiple motors a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short circuit current E Protecting the motor against thermal overload According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal ov
86. value on Py POWER the motor rating plate 9914 PHASE Inverts two phases in the motor cable This changes the INVERSION direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box 264 Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 265 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus System overview The drive is connected to an external control system via embedded fieldbus The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transaction is half duplex Embedded fieldbus connection is either RS 232 control panel connector X2 or RS 485 I O terminals 23 26 The maximum length of the communication cable with RS 232 is restricted to 3 meters RS 232 is designed for a point to point application a single master controlling one slave RS 485 is designed for a multipoint application a single master controlling one or more slaves 266 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus controller Fieldbus RS 232 panel connector Embedded fieldbus Modbus connection is either RS 232 or RS 485 J RS 485 I O terminals 23 26 Data flow lt 4 Control Word CW
87. with I O 59 E How to perform a manual start up For the manual start up you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assistant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to REM CHOICE i EXIT Do you want to run the Start up Assistant If you press 7 the oe hie AA Start up Assistant is not run and you can assistant continue with manual start up in a similar manner NO EXIT 00 00 OK as described below for the Basic Control Panel If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the REM UPAR EDIT language the Basic Control Panel does not 9901 LANGUAGE support languages See parameter 9901 for the ENGLISH values of the available language alternatives 0 For instructions on how to set parameters with the CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Assistant Control Panel see section Assistant Control Panel on page 78 O Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on o ABB Motors the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal 3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 M L 55 speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate setting
88. with embedded fieldbus Communication profiles The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles e DCU communication profile e ABB Drives Limited communication profile e ABB Drives Full communication profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and it is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment The ABB Drives Limited is based on the PROFIBUS interface ABB Drives Full profile supports two Control Word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus Embedded fieldbus network RS 232 485 Drive ABB DRV FULL LIMITED ABB Drives profile DCU profile Actual values selected by par 5310 5317 DCU PROFILE DCU profile Control Status Word DCU profile i Data conversion E for REF1 2 Actual values selected by par 5310 5317 E ABB Drives communication profile Two implementations of the ABB Drives communication profile are available ABB Drives Full and ABB Drives Limited The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV LIM The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below The ABB Drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2 The Control Word commands are in effect when parameter 7007 EXT1 COMMANDS or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS whichever control location is active is set to COMM
89. 0 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common r pco pitarimtcommon n Stop 0 Start 1 SSS 413Di2 Forward 0 Reverse 14 0I3_ Speedreferenceup 15 014__ Speedreference down 16 015 Constant speed 1 parameter 1202 X1B e Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 8119 RONO _ 20 DOSRC_ Digital output max 100 mA 2821 ESC g No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive the 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp speed reference is unchanged Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 lbf in The existing speed reference is stored during stop and power down 106 Application macros Hand Auto macro This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is needed To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 5 HAND AUTO For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 151 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A y Sc E EII 2 An ZA 10 eternos volage 10 VDC max 70ma Do 47 5 A2 Motor speed reference Auto 0 20 MAY mex son ohm JT JO CND Analog input cut common OPT TH o eter ened o 2004 oo 8 GND Analog output circuit common 8 2a Ary votage output 24 V DC max 200
90. 1 pole filter Filter time constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Error Process error value 100 t PID output D part of controller output Gain 4001 0 0 10 0s Derivation time If parameter value is set to zero the 0 1s derivative part of the PID controller is disabled 4004 PID DERIV Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the FILTER process PID controller Increasing the filter time smooths the derivative and reduces noise 4005 ERROR Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and N VALUE INV drive speed Normal A decrease in feedback signal increases drive NO speed Error Ref Fbk YES Inverted A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive 1 speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections 4 4007 UNIT SCALE _ Defines the decimal point location for the display parameter 1 selected by parameter 4006 UNITS 1 0 1 0s 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant If parameter value is set to zero the 1 0 1s derivative filter is disabled l 3 O Yo Actual signals and parameters 217 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 4 Example Pl 3 141593 4007 value Display ESO 00003 3 00031 3 1 00314 3 14 1 2 4008 0 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100 VALUE the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values Units 4006 Scale 4007 1000
91. 10 V ae B00 a 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AD Motor speed value 0 20 mA Pea a O O O O 2 24 Airy volage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common i pcom Digital input common 12 D11 Start forward if D11 Did the drive stops X1B prea Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 19 RONO olose Digital output max 100 mA Oat DOOUT eg No fault Fault 1 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 4 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters O Jo Set speed through Al 2205 and 2206 1 0 Speed 1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp o 1 Speed 2 1203 Tight t 0 4N 5 lbf in Speed 3 1204 ightening torque 0 m 3 5 Ibf in Application macros 105 Motor Potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 4 MOTOR POT For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 151 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1A ono 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Motor speed value 0 20mA Se ee 9 2200 Ain voltage output 24 V DC max 20
92. 11 065535 5317 EFB PAR 17 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register SS 40012 0 65585 5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus Sets an additional delay before the drive begins transmitting response to the master request 0 65535 Delay in milliseconds 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL 0000 hex Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 0000 FFFF Control Word hex 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL 0000 hex Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word 0000 FFFF Status Word hex 6401 PVL SIGNAL Defines the Ena logged for ro value fo X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 6402 PVL FILTER Defines the filter time for peak value logging TIME 0 0 120 0s Filter time Actual signals and parameters 241 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 6403 LOGGERS Defines the source for the reset of loggers NOT SEL RESET NOTSEL_ Noresetselected O See selection DI1 INV X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 6405 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the base value from which the percentage BASE distribution is calculated Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL 407 PEAK TIME 1 Date of the peak value detection 0 65535 d Day on whic
93. 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI4 1 active O inactive Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI5 1 active O inactive DI1 2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and 7 DI2 1 DI active O DI inactive No constant speed Speed defined by par 7202 CONST SPEED 1 Speed defined by par 7203 CONST SPEED 2 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 DIAS See selection DI1 2 DBA oo O See selection DI1 2 Das See selection D11 2 2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 DI2 and 12 DI3 1 DI active 0 DI inactive 4 0 0 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED T 0 1 0 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 1 0 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 0 1 Speed defined by par 7205 CONST SPEED 4 1 Speed defined by par 7206 CONST SPEED 5 0 1 1 Speed defined by par 1207 CONST SPEED 6 Speed defined by par 1208 CONST SPEED 7 DI3 4 5 See selection DI1 2 3 TIMED FUNC 1 External speed reference speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used depending on parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and timed function 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 17 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 8 168 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No N
94. 121 Programmable analog output 0 0c eee eens 121 Sells june neh repara Aeneas eee eee Aen ee va Sees Ree et 121 eo A eee eee ee ee ee ee ee 121 Programmable digital inputs 20 160 44cbe edevebdew dd ebeebeeeavsiweveewawed 122 SSNS ats ee ce ate eek OA 122 D eae ie A cere bead Leet dee da Oe Ee Eb ea dee 123 Programmable relay output 0 0 eee een ene ens 123 SSMNGS OPS DE AS 123 DAGNO U lt a aaa ede daa aa ea AR ao dee ete eee ae ees 123 FICQUCHEY NDUE ovocitos eo sd a ai aii e 123 SOMOS anna oe baat eate oa A EN as 123 SONO SMS teca eRe a lll ee dia ek ee ee eos rica dad 124 Transistor OUUTE iaa ie de RO aia al dad de ee aaa 124 Sle rar ee ee ee ee ee ao AA aa ua o 124 Bea ie ae saws Vet bee eek arrienda eto ade ee ber 124 A Be oh te A eke Stk Wd he ed oe ds ee ee oe ed Pah a Bes 124 o O 124 es AAA II 125 Power loss Mde tROUA sosse dorsa ai too rd a lea a ae 125 SSMS sae eek EC anar ee alesana 125 nec O 126 CUNS darias oa ores a aa wrk eee E rasa 126 Table of contents 9 Maintenance Migger sssr a ate sees ncaa sie ald tpn a E a es to Wn dele a it a ae Reo ek 126 SOMOS rra ae cee awh Cae eA ee ER eee A eee 126 Acceleration and deceleration rampS nananana eee eee ene 126 DOWNS 6 6 4 Gb he ee oO ee dee ok eh eee Ot i Ge Oh eee Qe GS 126 onca Speeds creeis rs Wh et i ee are A ed a ee Ea 127 SE AA O ee ee ee se eee ee a eer ee ee ee eee eee 127 CONSIGNE SPEGUS 4 45 seria haa oid ee cen de She e a b
95. 2 CONST SPEED 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 1 Speed defined by parameter 1205 CONST SPEED 4 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 7704 REF1 MIN Note MINIMUM Al value must not exceed MAXIMUM Al value Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 7705 REF1 MAX Actual signals and parameters 171 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 100 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 10 mA 20 mA 100 50 1303 FIL
96. 2 can be supervised via relay outputs RO R4 and digital output DO See parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 1805 DO SIGNAL NOT SEL User Parameter Set change is not possible through a digital input Parameter Sets can be changed only from control panel DI1 User Parameter Set control through digital input DI1 Falling 1 edge of digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 1 is loaded into use Rising edge of digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 2 is loaded into use DI1 INV User Parameter Set control through inverted digital input 1 DI1 Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 2 is loaded into use Rising edge of inverted digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 1 is loaded into use DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 178 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source NOT SEL for the local control mode lock signal When local lock is active entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel NOT SEL Local control is allowed C Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1 Rising edge of digital input DI1 Local control disabled Falling edge of digital input DI1 Local control allowed Fieldbus interface as the sourc
97. 3008 ZERO SPEED Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 70 LOAD LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 25 150 Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of 1 1 the nominal motor current Actual signals and parameters 197 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3009 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 35 Hz LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 3008 have default values ly Output current In Nominal motor current fo Output frequency ferk Break point frequency A Trip time 1 250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100 load 3010 STALL Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition The NOT SEL FUNCTION protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall region see the figure below longer than the time set by parameter 3072 STALL TIME Current A Stall region 0 95 User defined limit User defined limit 2003 MAX CURRENT Par 3011 NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL and the motor coast to a stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL 2 3011 STALL Defines the frequency limit for the stall function See FREQUENCY parameter 3010 STALL FUNCTION 198 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 05 50 0 Hz 1 3012 STALL TIME Defines
98. 3403 Value Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM See the figure for parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Signed Unsigned value Unit is selected by parameter 3405 OUTPUT 1 UNIT Example Pl 3 14159 0 0 00 0 000 204 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description BAR METER _ Bar graph DIRECT Direct value Decimal point location and units of measure are identical to the source signal Note Parameters 3402 3403 and 3405 3407 are not effective 3405 OUTPUT1 Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by Hz UNIT parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Note Unit selection does not convert values NO UNIT No unit selected A ampere Pp A a o O o Hz hertz percent ls sd hour pm revolutions per minute O m CET Celsius pounds per foot milliampere millivolt kilowatt als 7 lt S e oo wd rl Pl Pol pol Pol pol pol pol ml al al alas al al al ala N al Kl ow rp o 10 0 O N olal KR ol rpm l ol al N ol a Ki wlrm lo D oi Tl o m Fo ahrenheit a gt orsepower megawatt hour meters per second cubic meters per hour cubic decimeters per second Alo Q ilopasca
99. 40003 for REF2 COMM AI1 270 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 bit input and output data words with ABB Drives profile and 32 bit input and output words with DCU profile E Control Word and Status Word The Control Word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control Word The Status Word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller E References References REF are 16 bit signed integers A negative reference eg reverse direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as the frequency or process reference E Actual Values Actual Values ACT are 16 bit words containing selected values of the drive Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 271 Fieldbus references Mi Reference selection and correction Fieldbus reference called COMM in signal selection contexts is selected by setting a reference selection parameter 1103 or 1106 to COMM COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 When 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM the fieldbus reference is forwarded
100. 401 LAST FAULT 0472 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0473 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 store the most recent faults Parameters 0404 0409 show drive operation data at the time the latest fault occurred The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode on page 92 for more information Fault tracing 289 Alarm messages generated by the drive CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 OVERCURRENT 0308 bit 0 programmable fault function 1670 OVERVOLTAGE 0308 bit 1 programmable fault function 1670 UNDERVOLTAGE 0308 bit 2 programmable fault function 1610 DIR LOCK 0308 bit 3 lO COMM 0308 bit 4 programmable fault function 3018 3019 Al LOSS 0308 bit 5 programmable fault function 3007 3021 Al2 LOSS 0308 bit 6 programmable fault function 3001 3022 Output current limit controller is active DC overvoltage controller is active DC undervoltage controller is active Change of direction is not allowed Fieldbus communication break Analog input Al1 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Analog input Al2 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Check motor load Check acceleration time 2202 and 2205 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site
101. 5 1607 5201 nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User Set 1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 110 and then uploaded to panel Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User Set 2 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels 77 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Go to the Main menu by pressing 37 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing CZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the panel is not in the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key 4 S or SY until you see CoPY Press 37 3 To upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control panel step to uL with keys CaS and Cv Press 537 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL A Download all is used as an example with keys CA5 and
102. 5207 BUFFER Number of characters which overflow the buffer ie number OVERRUNS of characters which exceed the maximum message length 128 bytes 0 65535 Number of characters 5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check error received by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 53 EFI O7 Ol mbedded fieldbus 5 as 2 chapter 5301 EFB Contains the identification and program revision of the i PROTOCOL ID protocol 0000 FFFF Format XXYY hex where XX protocol ID and hex YY program revision of the protocol 5302 EFB STATION Defines the address of the device Two units with the same 1 ID address are not allowed on line 0 65535 Actual signals and parameters 239 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 5303 EFB BAUD Defines the transfer rate of the link E 1 2 kbit s a 2 4 Koil mi The same setting must be used in all on line stations E NONE 1 No parity bit one stop bit 8 data bis b PROFILE Communication AA on page 278 LIM A EA DC profe SSCS ABB DRV ABB Drives profile FULL 5306 EFB OK Number of valid messages received by the drive During MESSAGES normal operation this number increases constantly 0 65535 Number of messages 5307 EFB CRC Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy ERRORS check error received by the drive I
103. 6 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done aoe ee Sourcomin 4016 3 Current o 2 nominal current A Normal B Inversion ACT1 minimum gt ACT1 maximum ACT1 ACT1 AN Source min Source max Source min Source max Source signal Source signal 1000 1000 Value in percent 4019 ACT1 Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an MAXIMUM analog input is selected as a source for ACT1 See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT The minimum 4078 ACT MINIMUM and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller See parameter 4078 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 Value in percent 4020 ACT2 See parameter 4078 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 MINIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4078 4021 ACT2 See parameter 4079 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4019 4022 SLEEP Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL SELECTION activation input See section Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control on page 137 NOT SEL No sleep function selected DI1 The function is activated deactivated through digital input 1 DI1 1 activation O deactivation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY ar
104. 7 A Dimensions 325 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 1 64 42 20 gt EPT ee 20 EA A 6 6 L0 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 169 62 AS TD O DO D Co 0 4 3AUA0000051086 A 326 Dimensions Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open LO oo o E Es at aes pi LO o gt oo E 05 ES D gt LO oe CO es HET A LO A i T Y gt gt om a Bee CE o mu Ju men ee 46 EN KO CO y T A AA ee LO ey 5 a JE T Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051090 A Frame size R2 NEMA 1 ed Dimensions 327 1 97 EN JU L6 36 162 t On A TT gt oy 81 S lt gt A r e lt gt SD Ez Q A i a NM o O gt lt O Y ae LO O HHA Los iain UAN EE IEEE PEEP S WU DU Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 4 13 gt be el e 05 3AUA0000051097 A 328 Dimensions Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet install
105. 709REFT SELECT DisU4o See parameter 1105 REF1 SELECT e cow See parameter 1105 REF1 SELECT e COWNWAI See parameter 1105 REF1 SELECT o 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 0 0 Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque See the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits 1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 100 0 Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque See the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits Actual signals and parameters 167 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 11201 CONST Activates the constant speeds drive output frequencies or DI3 4 SPEED SEL selects the activation signal NOT SEL No constant speed in use O DI1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 1 activated through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI2 1 active O inactive Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 3 activated through digital input DI3 1 active O inactive Speed defined by parameter
106. A 1 SCR Signal cable shee screen 2 IA aL foe Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V aay BOOM 6 GND Analog input circuit common Kr a Output teguenty value 0 20 mA 8 GND Analog output circuit common re aunty voltage ouput 24 V DO max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common m DCOM Digitalinput common ajon Stop 0 Start 1 X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 ronc No fault Fault 1 19 RONO A Digital output max 100 mA Oat DOOUT No fault Fault 1 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters O O Set speed through Al 2205 and 2206 oh Speed 1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp 1 Speed 2 1203 E Tight t 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Speed 3 1204 ightening torque m in Application macros 103 3 wire macro This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three constant speeds To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 3 WIRE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 151 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and st
107. ACS310 User s Manual ACS310 Drives Ak ED ED PAIDID List of related manuals DRIVE MANUALS ACS310 Short User s Manual ACS310 User s Manual OPTION MANUALS MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual for ACS310 ACS350 MUL1 R1 Installation Instructions for ACS150 ACS310 and ACS350 MUL1 R3 Installation Instructions for ACS150 ACS310 and ACS350 MUL1 R4 Installation Instructions for ACS310 and ACS350 SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module Quick Start up Guide SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual MAINTENANCE MANUALS Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 and ACS ACH550 1 Multilingual 2 Delivered as a printed copy with the drive optional equipment 3 Delivered in PDF format with the drive optional equipment Code EN 3AUA0000044200 3AUA0000044201 Code EN 3AFE68591074 3AUA0000035974 3AFE68642868 3AFE68643147 3AUA0000025916 3AUA0000042902 3AUA0000042896 Code EN 3AFE68735190 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 All manuals are available in PDF format on the Internet See section Document library on the Internet on page 333 User s Manual ACS310 Table of contents AE i 1 Safety UNG 4 Mechanical Installation Fl 6 Electrical installation DIR 8 Start up and control with I O 3AUA0000044201 Rev A 2008 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved EFFECTIVE 15 11 2008 Table of contents 5 Table
108. AM L See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM E 3419 OUTPUT3 Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by UNIT parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Konak Setting range depends on parameter 3475 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting 3421 OUTPUT3 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3475 setting npel ne 1en 3501 SENSOR Activates the motor temperature measurement function and NONE TYPE selects the sensor type See also parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS NONE The function is inactive o 1 x PT100 The function is active The temperature is measured with 1 one Pt 100 sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using two 2 Pt 100 sensors See selection 1 x PT100 3 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using three 3 Pt 100 sensors See selection 1 x PT100 208 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Nam
109. B CON FILE 6306 0306 bit 12 FORCE TRIP FF90 0306 bit 13 Drive internal fault Thermistor used for drive internal temperature measurement is open or short circuited Drive internal fault Current measurement is out of range Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum maximum speed Operating range limits are set by parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Internal drive ID fault Internal configuration file error Fieldbus communication break Configuration file reading error Trip command received from fieldbus Fault tracing 297 WHAT TO DO Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Check fault function parameters Check minimum maximum frequency settings Check adequacy of motor braking torque Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265 Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate Contact your local ABB representative See appropriate communication
110. Cv Press 37 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion E Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel on page 292 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions 78 Control panels Assistant Control Panel E Features The Assistant Control Panel features e alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display e language selection for the display e Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning e copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system e context sensitive help e real time clock Control panels 79 E Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel 1 Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section LEDs on page 306 2 LCD display Divided into three main areas f Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 80 g Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms h Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled
111. Description Def FbEq A112 SF TPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN aa 4113 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX i MAX 4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL Le 4115 FBK See parameter 4075 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER 4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT ro 4117 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT Ld 4118 ACT1 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4119 ACT1 See parameter 4079 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4120 ACT2 See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4121 ACT2 See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4122 SLEEP See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION SELECTION 4123 PID SLEEP See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL LEVEL 4124 PID SLEEP See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY DELAY 4125 WAKE UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE UP DEV Lo 4126 WAKE UP See parameter 4026 WAKE UP DELAY DELAY 4128 PID OUT MIN See parameter 4028 PID OUT MIN La 4129 PID OUT MAX See parameter 4029 PID OUT MAX Pe 4130 SLEEP BOOST See parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME TIME 4131 SLEEP BOOST See parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST STEP STEP 4136 INTERNAL See parameter 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 SETPNT2 4137 INTERNAL See parameter 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 SETPNT3 4138 INTERNAL See parameter 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 SETPNT4 4139 INTSETPNT See parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL _ SEL 4201 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN 4001 GAIN 4202 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME m TIME 4203 DER
112. ER 11 UNDER UNDER 222 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4023 PID SLEEP Defines the start limit for the sleep function If the motor 0 0 Hz LEVEL speed is below a set level 4023 longer than the sleep delay 4024 the drive shifts to the sleeping mode The motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm message PID SLEEP Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to INTERNAL Reference Sleep boost time 4030 m Sleep boost step 4031 1 Selected process actual Wake up delay value 40 Wake up level deviation 4025 Output frequency Control t 4 Sleep delay l tb2 4 panel E lt tog 0 0 500 0 Hz Sleep start level 1 0 1 Hz 4024 PID SLEEP Defines the delay for the sleep start function See parameter 60 0 s DELAY 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL When the motor speed falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the counter is reset 0 0 3600 0s Sleep start delay Actual signals and parameters 223 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation for the sleep function The drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from the PID reference value exceeds the set wake up deviation 4025 longer than the wake up delay 4026 Wake up level depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings If parameter 4005 is set 0 Wake u
113. FbEq 3107 AR AI lt MIN Activates deactivates the automatic reset for fault AI lt MIN DISABLE analog input signal under the allowed minimum level Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE inactive OO OO OOOO l ENABLE Active 1 WARNING The drive may restart even after a long stop if the analog input signal is restored Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger 3108 AR EXTERNAL Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE FLT EXTERNAL FAULT 1 2 Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME OISABLE Inactive O OOOO ooo 3201 SUPERV 1 Selects the first supervised signal Supervision limits are 103 PARAM defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Example 1 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO lt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay energizes when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV 1 UNDER Relay energizes when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high
114. Figure b is also usable However for frequency input always use a shielded cable Double shielded twisted Single shielded twisted multipair cable multipair cable Run analog and digital signals in separate cables Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the relay controlled signals are run as twisted pairs Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable Hi Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic screen for example LFLEX by LAPPKABEL has been tested and approved by ABB Control panel cable In remote use the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 m 10 ft The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other It is recommended that the motor cable input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the groundin
115. GH Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks 0309 bit 14 outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 2032 PIPE FILL Pipe fill in progress See parameters 4421 4426 0309 bit 15 INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 0310 bit O inlet too low side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 2034 OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks HIGH outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP 0310 bit 1 PROTECTION 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions eg parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output 292 Fault tracing Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code A5xxx ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5001 Drive is not responding Check panel connection 5002 Incompatible Contact your local ABB representative communication profile 5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload backup file Retry parameter download 5011 Drive is controlled from Change drive control to local control mode another source 5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction See parameter locked 1003 DIRECTION Panel control is disabled Start from the panel is not possible Reset the because start inhibit is emergency stop command or remove the 3 wire
116. Hz RO 30 m 100 ft R1 R4 50 m 165 ft With output chokes the motor cable length may be extended to 60 m 195 ft for RO and 100 m 330 ft for R1 R4 To comply with the European EMC Directive use the cable lengths specified in the table below for 4 kHz switching frequency The lengths are given for using the drive with the internal EMC filter or an optional external EMC filter 4 kHz switching Internal EMC filter Optional external frequency EMC filter Second environment 30 m 100 ft 30 m 100 ft category C3 1 minimum First A ca 30 m 100 ft category C2 1 1 See the new terms in section Definitions on page 318 Control connection data Analog inputs X1A 2 and 5 Analog output X1A 7 Auxiliary voltage X1A 9 Digital inputs X1A 12 16 frequency input X1A 16 Relay output X1B 17 19 Digital output X1B 20 21 RS 485 interface X1C 23 26 Efficiency Voltage signal unipolar bipolar Current signal unipolar bipolar Potentiometer reference value X1A 4 Resolution Accuracy Voltage Type Frequency input Input impedance Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Max continuous current Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Frequency Resolution Accuracy Cable Termination Isolation Transfer rate Communication type Protocol Technical data 315 0 2 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 10 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 0 4 20 mA R
117. INTERNAL E AS a Set Reset 4022 En 5 S 2 peaa PIDCtriActive 4024 4030 S R modulating q R lt 5320 B1 lt 7 Set Reset 1 5320 B2 j lect r INTERNAL x StartRq q lt 1 R DI1 4022 4026 aoe ESA 1 1 Activate sleeping 0 Deactivate sleeping 2 1 Activate sleep boost 0 Deactivate sleep boost Mot speed Actual speed of the motor refActive The reference EXT REF2 is in use See parameter 1102 PIDCtriActive 9902 is PID CTRL modulating The inverter IGBT control is operating 138 Program features E Example The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function Reference Sleep boost time 4030 ____ I I Sleep boost step 4031 Time Selected process i i Wake up delay actual value i 4026 gt I Wake up level deviation 4025 Time Output frequency Control panel PID SLEEP tg Sleep delay 4024 tsd i t lt tsd i gt z fr eI Time Stop Start Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump when parameter 4022 is set to INTERNAL The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep fun
118. ISi Corrugated cardboard The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte which is classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Applicable standards e IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 e IEC EN 60204 1 2006 e IEC EN 61800 3 2004 e UL 508C The drive complies with the following standards Electrical thermal and functional safety requirements for adjustable frequency a c power drives Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Eq
119. IVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME m TIME 228 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4204 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER FILTER 4205 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV VALUE INV 4206 UNTS Sse parameter 0060r J 2207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE 2208 0 VALUE See parameter 20080 VALUE 2209 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 vLE 4210 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL a SEL 4211 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT 4212 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN E MIN 4213 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX UN MAX 4214 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL LN 4215 FBK See parameter 4075 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER 4216 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT Pp 4217 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT AN 4218 ACT1 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4219 ACT1 See parameter 4079 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4220 ACT2 See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4221 ACT2 See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation NOT SEL ees age Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT Ha Digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive ON Activation at drive power up Power up drive powered active TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function Timed function 1 active PID control active See parameter g
120. L 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM DIRECT 9 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT HZ 3 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 88 Control panels Display Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the LOC UPAR EDIT minimum and maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 HZ Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 LOC UPAR EDIT OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 2500 0 ie OUTPUT3 MAX CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Control panels 89 E Assistants mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up Assistant is divided into assistants each of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set for example Motor Set up or PID Control The Start up Assistant activates the assistants one after the other You may also use the assistants independently For more information on the tasks of the assistants see section Start up Assistant on page 111 In the Assistants mode you can e use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assi
121. M Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected by parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3204 SUPERV 2 Selects the second supervised signal Supervision limits are PARAM defined by parameters 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO and 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI See parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 104 X X 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal LO selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit KX Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting 202 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal HI selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting 3207 SUPERV 3 Selects the third supervised signal Supervision limits are 105 PARAM defined by parameters 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO and 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI See parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the li
122. M FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ are within range 300 Fault tracing 1001 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1009 FAULT PAR PFC REF NEG 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR Al SCALE 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR AO SCALE 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR PCU 2 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR EXT RO 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR FBUSMISS 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR PCU 1 6320 0307 bit 15 Incorrect PFC parameters Incorrect analog input Al signal scaling Incorrect analog output AO signal scaling Incorrect motor nominal power setting Incorrect extension relay output parameters Fieldbus control has not been activated Incorrect motor nominal speed frequency setting WHAT TO DO Check parameter group 87 PFC CONTROL settings Check that following applies e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 0 when 8123 is ACTIVE or SPFC ACTIVE Check parameter group 13 ANALOG INPUTS settings Check that following applies e 1307 MINIMUM Al1 lt 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 e 1304 MINIMUM Al2 lt 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Check parameter group 75 ANALOG OUTPUTS settings Check that following applies e 1504 MINIMUM AO1 lt 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Check parameter 9909 setting Following must apply e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Px lt 3 0 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in kW or Px 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in hp Check parameter settings Check that following applies e Rela
123. OFETACTWE ooo o OPERATION maeme o o o Nott o Jorzacme oS o Jorane oo y O 0 Swicron inhibitnotactve 1 Marm See chapter Fault racing on page 287 9 poa o oo aa SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals reference value is within tolerance limits ie the difference between the output frequency and the frequency reference is less than or equal to 4 1 of the nominal motor frequency Asymmetric hysteresis 4 when frequency enters the reference area 1 when frequency exits the reference area ae ee value differs from reference value is outside ee oe limits a aa 11 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 CAN Drive control location LOCAL Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Bit value is O until the supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 281 ABB Drives profile EFB Status Word parameter 5320 Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram E EXT CTRL LOC j External control location EXT2 selected O External control location EXT1 selected EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received o i No External Run Enable received a 282 Fieldbu
124. ON COJ S sumidos reir e eR EEE e eee ee eh eee 275 Exception codeS cade ciccdecakhaedeedeadeerdsderdiabrdaedaadsaideedeudd ada 275 Communication Promesa ode Sd oem ed web eed den Sa in de Sew oe ee 276 ABB Drives communication profile 0 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 276 DGU communication profile 22422 cc2cee era ceva ees eee ee AA Es 281 12 Table of contents 14 Fault tracing What this Chapter contains id src da rd A ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee er ree eee Alarm and fault indications vie cio nasa ded ea Glee die oe ee dea oe eke eed wee PHO TSS eaa a tape tree areca evens amp Si iba Sete atid eine op al aa Rem rl he ere aaa POUL MISO wus cee eee orks eee eine ne Bee one Ohare ee Aaa Old hee Baca Alarm messages generated by the drive 0 0 eae Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel 0 00 00 cece es Fault messages generated by the drive nananana eee eee Embedded fieldbus faults 0 0 00 0 nent eee No Master CEVICE cc cee eae cen ele dow bd aS OR SSNS Stee he deed eee es aes Same device addreSS 1 ee eee eens de es AS 15 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains o ooooooo ee eee eens Maintenance intervals 0 00 ee eee eee e ees COOING IAN oseese phd ee ed ee Ce Se ee oe Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 2 0 0 0 es CAD ACN ONS tosses e a E oth dos sus re gee eek o ods oS Gude Ok
125. PID 2 SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4706 UNIT and 4707 UNIT SCALE settings Actual signals and parameters 155 All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNIT and 4707 UNIT SCALE settings 0132 PID 1 Deviation of the process PID1 controller ie the difference DEVIATION between the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0133 PID 2 Deviation of the PID2 controller ie the difference between DEVIATION the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNIT and 4707 UNIT SCALE settings 0134 COMM RO Relay output Control Word through fieldbus decimal See 1 1 WORD parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0135 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1 0136 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 2 0137 PROCESS Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 1 DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS Process variable 2 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 2 DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS Process variable 3 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 3 DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter thousands of hours 1 0 01 Runs when the dr
126. R4 O Varistor grounding screw VAR RS 485 connection al _d dd _ gt _ A ow mn 00 Operation principle and hardware description 25 E Power connections and control interfaces The diagram gives an overview of connections I O connections are parameterable See chapter Application macros on page 99 for I O connections for the different macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 45 for installation in general Control panel A RJ 45 E iI Be l Modbus RTU RSE Screen 10SCR RS 232 aed a 1 20 Alt AQOT Analog output 30 GND mafe GNDos 0 20 mA Reference voltage vil 10 V DC max 10mA p 10V Analog input 2 90 Al2 60 GND Aux voltage output 90 24 V PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 24 V DC max 200 mA 106 GND AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS 119Dcom ROCOM 17 120DI1 218 Relay output RONG 250 VAC 30VDC 6A PROGRAMMABLE 139 DI2 19 DIGITAL INPUTS 140 D13 DOSRC 520 er vot bool igital frequency output 150 D14 Y gt ew O21 PNP transistor type DIS can also be used 46d pis DOGND 22 30 V DC max 100 mA as a frequency input 230 SHIELD A Output relay dec AE ae Ea 77 module MREL 01 250A Ez ANA EMC EMC filter grounding screw 6 FlashDrop VAR amp Varistor grounding screw D D L1 0U U22 mea 3 phase power E e supply L2 OV1 V2 IET AC motor 200 480 V AC L3 O W1 W20 26 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation la
127. REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 7704 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 273 E Fieldbus reference scaling Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following table Note Any correction of the reference see section Reference selection and correction on page 273 is applied before scaling Reference Range Reference type 32767 Frequency a par 1105 Final reference limited by 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 20000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 32767 Frequency 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 10000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1707 REF2 MIN have no effect on the reference scaling 2 4 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus E Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 using the parameters in group 10 START STOP DIR Fieldbus references are bipolar ie they can be negative or positive The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference REF1 REF2 Direction determined
128. Restore power 306 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Control panel E Cleaning the control panel Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window E Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions except the clock LEDs There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive They are visible through the panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive The Assistant Control Panel has one LED The table below describes the LED indications Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking On the front of No power Green Power supply on Green Drive in an alarm the drive the board OK state If a control panel is attached to the drive switch to remote control otherwise a fault will be generated and then remove the panel to be able Drive in a fault Drive in a fault state state To reset To reset the fault the fault press switch off the drive RESET from the power control pane
129. S Other patents pending 5 301 085 5 799 805 6 184 740 6 316 896 6 597 148 6 922 883 6 977 449 7 036 223 7 098 623 7 221 152 7 279 802 7 388 765 D512 696 5 463 302 5 940 286 6 195 274 6 335 607 6 600 290 6 940 253 6 984 958 7 045 987 7 102 325 1 227 325 7 280 938 D503 931 D521 466 5 921 483 5 942 874 6 229 356 6 370 049 6 741 059 6 934 169 6 985 371 7 057 908 7 109 780 7 245 197 7 330 095 D510 319 D541 743S D541 7445S 5 932 568 5 952 613 6 252 436 6 396 236 6 774 758 6 956 352 6 992 908 7 059 390 7 164 562 7 250 739 7 349 814 D510 320 5 589 704 6 094 364 6 265 724 6 448 735 6 844 794 6 958 923 6 999 329 7 067 997 7 176 779 7 262 577 7 352 220 D511 137 5 612 604 6 147 887 6 305 464 6 498 452 6 856 502 6 967 453 7 023 160 7 082 374 7 190 599 7 271 505 7 365 622 D511 150 D541 745S D548 182S 321 322 Technical data Dimensions 323 Dimensions Dimension drawings of the ACS310 are shown below The dimensions are given in millimeters and inches 324 Dimensions Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 DIN rail 35 mm 20 lt 7 6 45 164 Leg d3 Liel 4 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA000005096
130. Selects the process actual value feedback signal forthe ACT1 process PID controller The sources for the variables ACT 1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4076 ACT 1 INPUT and 4017 ACT2 INPUT Actual signals and parameters 219 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ACTI ACT2 Subtraction of ACTI and ACT2 po ACTIHACTZ Addition or ACTA and ACTZ O O bo Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 E _ACTHAGT2 Division of ACT1 and ACTZ O O b MIN ACT1 2 Selects the smaller of ACTI and ACTZ e o o T S sqA1 sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of gt ACT2 aae sueroa O oo 4015 FBK Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by MULTIPLIER parameter 4014 FBK SEL Parameter is used mainly in applications where feedback value is calculated from a other variable eg flow from piecu difference 32 767 used Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also e parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM AM uses analog input torace Oo o COMM ACT Uses value of signal 0758 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACTA 6 FREQINPUT Frequencyinput O e parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT Ly 220 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4018 ACT1 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 0 MINIMUM Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 401
131. T 3210 0305 bit 1 DEV OVERTEMP 4210 0305 bit 2 SHORT CIRC 2340 0305 bit 3 DC UNDERVOLT 3220 0305 bit 5 Al LOSS 8110 0305 bit 6 programmable fault function 3001 3027 Al2 LOSS 8110 0305 bit 7 programmable fault function 3001 3022 Output current has exceeded trip level Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Fault trip limit is 135 C Short circuit in motor cable s or motor Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing input power line phase blown fuse rectifier bridge internal fault or too low input power Analog input Al1 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Analog input Al2 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Check motor load Check acceleration time 2202 and 2205 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 309 Check that overvoltage controller is on parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Check input power line for static or transient overvoltage Check deceleration time 2203 2206 Check ambient conditions See also section Derating on page 309 Check air flow and fan operation Check motor powe
132. T temperature in C 1 0 1 C Ott EXTERNAL EXTERNAL oer a reference REF1 in Hz 1 0 1 Hz Ott EXTERNAL 1 0112 EXTERNAL External reference REF2 in percent ni on the use 1 0 1 REF 2 100 equals the maximum motor speed nominal motor torque or maximum process reference 0113 CTRL Active control location 0 LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 See 1 1 LOCATION section Local control vs external control on page 115 0114 RUN TIME R Elapsed drive running time counter hours Runs when the drive is modulating The counter can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0115 KWH kWh counter The counter can be reset by pressing UP and 1 1 kWh COUNTER R DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0116 APPL BLK Application block output signal Value is from either PFC 1 0 1 OUTPUT control if PFC control is active or from parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0120 Al 1 Relative value of analog input Al1 in percent 1 0 1 0121 Al2 Relative value of analog input Al2 in percent 0124 AO 1 Value of analog output AO in mA a mi 1 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller in percent 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 1 0 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0129
133. TER Al1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 ie the O time within 63 of a step change is reached Unfiltered signal A Filtered signal KH Time constant 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1s 100 0 100 0 See parameter 7307 MINIMUM AI1 1 0 1 0 1 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to 100 0 maximum mA V signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 7302 MAXIMUM Al1 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM All 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 See 0 1s parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 1 0 1s 1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 The relay energizes when the status meets the setting NOT SEL Notused OOOO ooo READY Ready to function Run Enable signal on no fault supply 1 voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal off Running Start signal on Run Enable signal on no active fault REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direcion O 172 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq STARTED The drive has received start command Relay is energized even if Run Enable signal is off Relay is de energized when drive receives a stop command or a fault oc
134. TION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held RAMP_IN Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO UN Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero 7 RESET O gt 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if par 7604 is set to COMM 0 Continue normal operation Not in use ABB DRV FULL Control Word 0 or Reference 0 Retain last Control Word and Reference Control Word O and Reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select external control location EXT2 Effective if par 7702 is set to COMM Select external control location EXT1 Effective if par 7702 is set to COMM Note Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled 10 11 280 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus ABB Drives profile Control Word parameter 5319 Bit Name Value Comments 12 Reserved 15 The following table and the state diagram later in this section describe the Status Word content for the ABB Drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the following block diagram ABB Drives profile EFB Status Word parameter 5320 Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram a RDY_ON 1 RDY_RUN RDY_ REF TRIPPED 4 OFF_2 STA OFF 3 STA a SWC_ON_INHIB a ALARM o NOTREADYTOSWITCHON o
135. UTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8720 INTERLOCKS gt 0 WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8720 INTERLOCKS gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts PFC with Autochange mode 0 1 TEST 0 1 Test mode Forces the interval to value 36 48 s MODE 0 0 Disables the Autochange function 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 336 h The operating time interval the time when the 0 1 336 0 h start signal is on between automatic motor changes All parameters Actual signals and parameters 251 No Name Value 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Description Def FbEq Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the 50 0 autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation a different motor takes a turn connected to the drive output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires e external swit
136. V OV 9OLL dno MO Ldld an en LOV dlid J9 0 JJUO9 Laid Joy peeds jUe SUOD 7 pasds jsuog VOLL pasds aBeJany peeds joued jojuop 391 NY ouanba y peeds N3Y 901 907 soy LOLL jUue SUOD Jou joued L V OV INO Laid onjen Ja o1juo9 LOY Ald Lald xOLLV OLOV zJ9J JQUed Jo9 as 191 LCId onvoor k setae ELY VILO LOV NINO J MOd anbo yuan IV ILCO Y LOY uo1 99 S pe did LAdNI OJH4 u IV ae Z 1 JQUed 24 CLXA co O lt Z oO o Jou jaued Jo9a as 194 1 1X3 gt E Z J aued JOVI LCL boly mzov plop 190 MINOS JOMOd anbJo yua uny IV uonoajas pe did 136 Program features E Settings 1501 PID2 output external controller connection to AO 9902 PID control macro selection Group 40 PROCESS PID SET PID1 settings 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Group 42 EXT TRIM PID PID2 settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0126 0127 PID 1 2 output value 0128 0129 PID 1 2 setpoint value 0130 0131 PID 1 2 feedback value 0132 0133 PID 1 2 deviation Program features 137 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the PID control is active NOT SEL
137. WH 0775 SAVED DONE RESET MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 DONE Reset not requested normal operation 0 RESET Reset energy counters The value reverts automatically to DONE 236 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4601 PUMP CLEAN Defines how Pump cleaning is triggered The pump cleaning sequence consists of forward and reverse steps Forward y Y Reverse 3 A A A A A 4607 4605 4604 4606 4604 4605 4604 4608 WARNING Before enabling the Pump cleaning function ensure it is safe to perform the Pump cleaning sequence with the connected equipment Notes The Pump cleaning overrides parameter 1003 DIRECTION The Pump cleaning function observes the maximum forward and reverse frequencies parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ The Pump cleaning always uses acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 and deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 The drive must be started and its Run Enable signal must be present before the Pump cleaning sequence can start DI1 SUP1OVR Enable on the rising edge of digital input DI1 trigger on SUPRV1 OVER parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION DI2 SUP1OVR See selection DI1 SUP1OVR DI3 SUP1OVR See selection DI1 SUP1OVR DI4 SUP1OVR See selection DI1 SUP1OVR DI5 SUP1OVR See selection DI1 SUP1OVR 1 SUPRV1 Trigger on SUPRV1 OVER
138. XIT 00 00 SEL Select the appropriate parameter group with keys As LOC UPAR GROUPS 99 and vw oo OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC U PARAMETERS orere APPLIC MACRO 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the appropriate parameter with keys lt a 5 and LOC PARAMETERS SY The current value of the parameter is shown 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO below the selected parameter ABB STANDARD 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR EXIT 00 00 EDIT EDIT Press s LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys A gt LOC UPAR EDIT and Cw ane Pressing the key once increments or decrements the Pere MA RO value Holding the key down changes the value faster IRE Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed i l value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE AVE e To save the new value press wir e Jo cancel the new value and keep the original press How to select the monitored signals You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 86 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals Signal 1 0703 OUTPUT FREQ Signal 2 0104 CURRENT Signal 3 07105 TORQUE To change the
139. XXXXXXXXXX Control panels 83 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control e To switch between remote control REM shown on the LOC tMESSAGE status line and local control LOC shown on the status Switching to_the line press 2 local control mode Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK 00 00 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press E The result depends on how long you press the key e f you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 85 If you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings e To stop the drive in local control press C gt The arrow U or 3 on the status line stops rotating e To start the drive in local control press lt lt gt gt The arrow U or 5 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint
140. You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 Control panels 81 Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can LOC start stop change the direction switch between local and 49 1 HZ remote control modify the reference value and monitor up s to three actual values 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the LOC UMAIN MENU 1 appropriate mode on the menu The status line see PARAMETERS section Status line on page 80 shows the name of the ASSISTANTS current menu mode item or state CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail O IN How to change the value ofa parameter Parameters 80 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed 91 Parameters How to view faults Fault Logger How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Time and Date 93 clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive asw Backup How to vi
141. a 2 lt 0 lt sated 8440066 dr RGSS OS e Foe Hees Control connection Cala as 2ac22i lt sese525 088 64208n8 Ch arar ada Yo sec hone A oh eee hr dtd ait WAR A an a he E ches hed Degrees of protection 0 cee eee eee ene een nenes AMDISM CONGINONS su oor ec ok is hh Reh ae Bas Hea eee Ream ae oe ee ee Table of contents 13 MAatetnlals is ass earn eran topes eshte uta enone ches e a ar ak 317 Applicable Standards 22 652 000 anar NEAR eee SoS eS ces 317 AR A Acces te Sec ghd eee os ete apn i Se ete hte ed ad a ac hen hs E he ad eee 318 Compliance with the European EMC Directive 0 0 0 ees 318 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 anaana nananana 318 D SNOT S aa teo rd dl Oo da iria el ana eae cris e 318 WALCO O2 O Inn 318 ao Go AAA O Fain ee ee OY 319 UEMAKO 460 mart nde eee eho hd heen eee heheh dao dd acta Gl 319 CME O A os E ke ke oe a eee on ee Be a ee ee eat Sa ee 319 CHHChIMaINING esparcir ceras rado bea ada th cence pale ete 320 POMS MAKING s ainge aah a Ween aie ce E alee ane ea ide Hee FON shia a ee eg a R 320 a A Soh see see Rarer ce tine shes ey aetna ay doar a Ss etn gneisses As at Hoa el sbtae a Sac et hese a 321 Patent protection in the USA 242 222 242202608 dada 852222 an0a4 Een Seeds ee eee ees 321 17 Dimensions Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 0 0 00 ccc eee eee Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL
142. a aia Sd eee eR eee eaten cea deed x 111 Start up Assistant canctacndcecemdn sends podeodre meee deseneeses hoe tbeseucteae 111 ss AA ee Se en A ee ek ee ee 111 Default order of the taSkS 1 0 0 0 eee a 112 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters 0 0 00 eee e eee 113 Contents of the assistant displays 0 0 ccc eee 115 Local control vs external control 0 0 ccc eee eens 115 Hole o Raw e ee ee A Se eee ce eee eee ee ee 116 EXI mal contol tac2004 4620 0e So Ode oia eo a a don ee EARS 116 SUING usable po ida wine Hara aio Te onal E edi doe tea ho Bue ae tha eed ah Et 116 EVANS e IMPOR ah a dt hele WW elke ay se SR A 117 Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 0 0 00 0c eee eee 117 Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 0 0 0 0 cee eee 117 Reference types and processing 0 ccc ccc ete eee een eens 118 o 26 si eet oh a nest ae ak Gs Rd ea REER ae Beh ed ws ee aT 118 VAC o e AAA IN domes gk Hes aa het ke A doe at a We Sh eo set se a 118 Reference MIMMING eiii e eed eye aa th hw Saw he ane A ed ee dk a 119 o 44665 20s heehee ban Gav ee eae Puneet ec pan saeat ae yap ous ot Hes ee eee 119 Example anna yates psa due io Sree ose Bae ee a oe Be ele ee ere oe 120 Programmable analog inputs ao eae a id a a bow te dade ww 120 o A GAGs Ob Rk SOO hoe Oe OS Oe Hed hub Gee 120 Bs o e AAA N hed ah head We ghd eas aan oe lk desk ah orcas RL ah A a hw oe a
143. a eee oe ai ee eee 92 Parameter Backup MOQ sesrcrerrinisyrseri sitke RRA A A a 94 VO SCUINGS MOdG seeds erat parole a una area Daba 97 10 Application macros What this chapter Contains socorro AEREA AA A eee 99 Overview OF MaCTOS u coses redii eni aE a e ORE ni tie 99 Summary of the I O connections of the application macros o oooooooooo 101 ABB Standard macro ves dedito See ee a 102 Default I O connections 0 00 00 0c ee ees 102 3 wire Macro oz og sted ates Be A e 103 Default I O connections 22 66 c ccs ce dared ceed eee Se eeGe Gate Seas Eee eed eee ees 103 Alternate macro 2n 24e8 dina rre he wee eee deere ood Rech daa 104 Default I O connections a 104 Motor Potentiometer macro ee ee ee 105 Default I O connections 0 00 00 0c ee eee 105 Hand Auto macro sus sta Cae 5 ea a do Oh ee ere ee ok 106 Default I O connections 0 00 00 0c ee ee 106 PID Control MaC 24 o2 26c e s 064 64564 bbe Chee SG pisto Shee eee cere nee 107 Default I O connections cc ee eee 107 PFC Control macro 2426 ent ce eee eee BORE ed AKERS EGR OEE REO Se RS 108 8 Table of contents Default I O connections ce eee eee 108 SPFC Control macro sesenta bo SA ewes AER ESCA ERS ORS ORR ESS 109 Default I O connections ee eee eee 109 User MACS eck ate eee Ose ee Ree oe Eidos e ee ire Odo da lia eee 110 11 Program features What this Chapter CONTAINS sid sic
144. ackup of a particular system Control panels 69 E Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel LCD display Divided into five areas a Upper left Control location LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu Fei Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint Sa Displayed value can be modified in the Parameter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting e Scrolls up through a menu or list e Increases a value if a parameter is selected e Increases the reference value in the Reference mode e Holding the key down changes the value faster e Scrolls down through a menu or list e Decr
145. age 271 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 271 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Actual signals and parameters 165 All parameters No Name Value Description DI3U 4D NC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 AI1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source Stop command
146. age 128 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2613 USER Defines the second frequency point of the custom U f curve 20 0 Hz DEFINED F2 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequeney O 2614 USER Defines the third voltage point of the custom U f curve atthe 47 5 of DEFINED U3 frequency defined by parameter 2675 USER DEFINED F3 Uy See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2615 USER Defines the third frequency point of the custom U f curve 25 0 Hz DEFINED F3 010 600 0H2 Frequency O 2616 USER Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U f curve at 76 of DEFINED U4 the frequency defined by parameter 2677 USER DEFINED Uj F4 See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2617 USER Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U f curve 40 0 Hz DEFINED F4 010 500 0H2 Frequency O Actual signals and parameters 193 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U f curve when frequency is equal 95 of to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency 9907 MOTOR Un NOM FREQ See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2619 DC Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC DISABLE STABILIZER stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus vol
147. al pump and fan applications 2 With squared U f ratio the noise level is lower for most operating frequencies USER Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610 2618 See 3 DEFINED section Custom U f ratio on page 128 2606 SWITCHING Defines the switching frequency of the drive Higher FREQ switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise See also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating on page 309 2607 SWITCH FREQ Activates the switching frequency control When active the ON L selection of parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is limited when the drive internal temperature increases See the figure below This function allows the highest possible switching frequency at a specific operation point Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise but higher internal losses Fay limit 16 kHz Drive temperature T 80 100 C 100 120 C Temperature depends on the drive output frequency ON LOAD Switching frequency can adapt to loading instead of limiting 2 the output current This allows maximum loading with all switching frequency selections The drive automatically decreases the actual switching frequency if loading is too high for the selected switching frequency 192 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2608 SLIP COMP Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation 0 RATIO control 100 means full slip compens
148. alue is set to THERMI 0 1 DI3 Digital input DI3 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 Digital input DI4 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 Actual signals and parameters 209 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI5 Digital input DI5 Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR T TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement Alarm MOTOR TEMP indication is given when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 1 alarm 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature measurement The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 1 fault 3505 AO Enables current feed from analog output AO Parameter DISABLE EXCITATION setting overrides parameter group 75 ANALOG OUTPUTS settings With PTC the output current is 1 6 mA With Pt 100 the output current is 9 1 mA DISABLE Disabled o ENABLE Enabled 3601 TIMERS Selects the source for the timed function enable signal NOT SEL ENABLE NOT SEL Timed function is not selected O Digital input DI Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1 DI1 CMODE Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1 Timed 1 function is in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the sto
149. alues The table below includes the parameter default values for different macros For other parameters the default values are the same for all macros See the parameter list starting on page 161 Name ABB 3 WIRE ALTERNA MOTOR HAND PID PFC SPFC Selection STANDARD TE POT AUTO CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL 9902 APPLIC 1 ABB 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTER 4 MOTOR 5 6 PID 7 PFC 15 SPFC MACRO STANDARD NATE POT en CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL 1001 EXT1 DI1 2 DI1P2P3 DI1F 2R Pe 2 pn 2 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL ll SEL sl 4 EA DS SEL 1103 REF1 DI3U SELECT AD NC 1106 REF2 Al2 PID1OUT PIDIOUT PID1OUT SELECT 1201 CONST DI3 4 DI4 5 DI3 4 DIS NOT SEL DI3 NOT SEL NOT SEL SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 A00N GAIN o O so no so Ps Ps ML molan to fo fio ps ps TIME 8116 AUX MOT 20 0s STOP D oo NOT SEL NOT SEL NOTSEL NOTSEL NOTSEL NOTSEL NOT SEL INTERV 8123 PFC ENABLE NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOTSEL NOT SEL NOTSEL ACTIVE SPFC ACTIVE 152 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals in the short parameter view Actual signals in the short parameter view No Name Value Description FbEq 04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history read only See group 04 FAULT HISTORY in the list of all parameters 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault Parameters in the short parameter view Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Va
150. ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 309 Check deceleration time 2203 and 2206 Check input power line for static or transient overvoltage Check input power supply Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION settings Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265 Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper analog control signal levels Check connections Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper analog control signal levels Check connections 290 Fault tracing CODE ALARM 2008 ert LOSS 0308 bit 7 programmable fault function 3002 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP 0308 bit 8 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings load and cooling 0305 bit 9 a ae m to Check start up data programmable fault e too hig 1 i to Check fault function parameters function insufficient motor 3005 3009 3503 power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor Check value of alarm limit temperature has Check that actual number of sensors exceeded alarm limit corresponds to value set by parameter set by parameter 3503 3501 SENSOR TYPE WHAT TO DO Control panel selected Check panel connection as active control Check fault function parameters location for drive h
151. ame Value Description Def FbEq TIMED Speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 19 FUN1 amp 2 See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL DI1 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 1 activated through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive DI2 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 2 activated through inverted digital input DI2 O active 1 inactive DI3 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 3 activated through inverted digital input DI3 O active 1 inactive DI4 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 4 activated through inverted digital input DI4 O active 1 inactive 7 DIS INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI5 O active 1 inactive DI1 2 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs D11 and DI2 1 DI active O DI inactive pappen SSS SSS S y y S No constant speed No constant speed O O O O OOO OOOO O 0 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 O Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 EEN Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 DI2 3 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 8 DI3 4 INV See selection DI1 2 INV E DI4 5 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 10 DI1 2 3 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 12 DI2 and DI3 1 DI active O DI inactive DI DIzDI Operation SS 0 1 1 Speed defined by
152. ameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 00 1800 2206 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 2 ie the time required for the 60 0 s TIME 2 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ to zero See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 2207 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 LINEAR 2 The function is deactivated during emergency stop a LINEAR See parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 1 0 1s 1000 0 s 2208 EMERG DEC Defines the time within the drive is stopped if an emergency 1 0 s TIME ue is activated See parameter 2709 EMERG STOP SEL 0 0 1800 0s 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero NOT SEL NOT SEL Not selected ge Digital input DI1 1 ramp input is forced to zero Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time Actual signals and parameters 189 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3 See selection DI1 DI4 See selection DI1 DI5 See selection DI1 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to zero ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O ra
153. ameter Jsem OOO O E Settings 1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO 4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 selection 4228 Timed external PID2 activation Program features 143 User load curve The user can specify a load curve motor torque as a function of frequency for supervision The curve is defined by five points Supervision can be set for the torque dropping below the underload curve exceeding the overload curve or both A fault is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the user defined time limit An alarm is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the half of the user defined time limit Motor torque Overload area AOS Torque Torque Torque Torque WN high 5 high 1 high 2 high 3 Torque Allowed operating area j 2 low 4 low 5 Torque low 3 Torque low 1 Output Underload A frequency Hz Freq 1 Freq 2 Freq 3 Freq 4 Freq 5 E Settings Additional information Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE User load curve settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0105 Motor torque aam OO USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than half of the defined time limit USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed
154. and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct torque Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed OO DODO 0 The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque 56 Installation checklist The motor cable input power cable and control cables are routed separately The external control I O connections are OK The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive with a bypass connection Terminal cover and for NEMA 1 hood and connection box are in place Start up and control with I O 57 Start up and control with I O What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to e perform the start up e start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels on page 67 How to start up the drive WARNING The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 15 must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on lt gt and the drive is in the remote control mode Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of dama
155. and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 Free DI2 Speed reg motor DI3 DI5 Free Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay DI5 Free Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed reg motor DI3 First PFC relay DI4 Second PFC relay DI5 Third PFC relay Not allowed Not allowed Free First PFC relay DI5 Free Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Free Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay 5 Not allowed Not allowed 256 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value DI3 Description Def FbEq Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input 3 starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI2 Free Not allowed Speed reg motor DI5 Free 1 DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC
156. andard I O With SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module it is possible to use Modbus TCP IP with the Ethernet For more information see SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000042896 English 116 Program features E Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control LOC indicates local control on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode E External control When the drive is in external control the commands are given through the standard I O terminals digital and analog inputs and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control External control is indicated with REM on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time This function operates on a 2 ms time level E Settings Panel key Additional information LOC REM Selection between local and external control Parameter 1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 1001 1002 Start stop direction source for EXT1 EXT2 1103 1106 Reference source for EXT1 EXT2 Program features 117 E
157. area for longer than the defined time limit PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load curve parameter setting 3704 gt 3707 or 3707 gt 3710 or 3710 gt 3713 or 3713 gt 3716 or 3705 gt 3706 or 3708 gt 3709 or 3711 gt 3712 or 3714 gt 3715 or 3717 gt 3718 144 Program features Energy optimizer Energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed Energy saving tools calculate energy saved in kWh and MWh energy saved in local currency as well as reduction in CO emission all compared to the situation when the pump is connected directly to the supply E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Energy saving settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0174 0175 Energy saved in kWh Mwh 0176 0177 Energy saved in local currency 0178 Reduction in CO emission Pump cleaning Pump cleaning sequence consists of cyclic forward and reverse steps See the figure below The pump cleaning cycle can be activated at start up with a user defined period with a selectable digital input or by the Supervision function for example triggered by the motor input current Forward Reverse E gt _ gt gt gt Si CS Trigger Forward Off Reverse Off Forward
158. at a time Switching between EXT 1 2 through digital input PID CONTROL PID control For application in which the drive controls a process value Eg pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump Measured pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive PFC PFC pump and fan control macro for pump alternation CONTROL applications gt N alal aw plo mi O E 09 T ala BR al 4 Polish ooo e wini lz U AN 262 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value SPFC CONTROL LOAD FD SET USER 1 LOAD Description SPFC soft pump and fan control macro for pump alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list eg selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English User 1 macro loaded into use Before loading check that the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application Def FbEq 31 USER S1 Save User 1 macro Stores the current parameter settings 1 SAVE and the motor model USER S2 LOAD User 2 macro loaded into use
159. ates deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT 2001 ALARMS OVERVOLTAGE 2002 UNDERVOLTAGE 2003 and DEVICE OVERTEMP 2009 For more information see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 W F E 2 IN amp TRAN E 1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown SHORT VIE on the control panel LASHDROP Shows the FlashDrop parameter list Does not include the 1 short parameter list Parameters which are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 LOAD FD SET SHORT VIEW Shows only a subset of all signals and parameters See section Actual signals in the short parameter view on page 152 and Parameters in the short parameter view on page 152 LONG VIEW Shows all signals section All actual signals on page 154 3 and parameters this table starting on page 767 NO lt Z h 7 O dl O 1801 FREQ INPUT Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a O Hz MIN frequency input See section Frequency input on page 123 0 10000 Hz Minimum frequency 1802 FREQ INPUT Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a 1000 Hz MAX frequency input See section Frequency input on page 123 0 10000 Hz Maximum frequency 1803 FILTER FREQ Defines the filter time constant for frequency input ie the IN time within 63 of a step change is reached See section Frequency input on page 123 0 0 10 0s Filter time consta
160. ation UL open FER a EX gt l LES gt Jl Se e mi wy co O ol boy EZ ES Y a E5 Y ES 1 a 5 S 50 A lt gt kes QA a a eS te Y aa ai 68 1 002 10897 EE t LE z pal o li 20 E gt D co 7 of lt gt LO Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051109 A Dimensions 329 Frame size R3 NEMA 1 G GE 5 83 48 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1 NI lt gt a O lt O NI 6 65 169 3AUA0000051118 A 330 Dimensions Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open a LO NI 3 E as E ES LO oe LS 10 ABS AAA bere der Lar L eE JUDO BEE s El Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051130 A Frame size R4 NEMA 1 D5 20 O NI 3 EAN 234 Dimensions 331 ole 7 41 138 p
161. ation 0 means no slip compensation Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation Example 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite the full slip compensation SLIP COMP RATIO 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz The static speed error is 35 Hz 34 Hz 1 Hz To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased 0 200 Slip gain 2609 NOISE Enables the noise smoothing function Noise smoothing DISABLE SMOOTHING _ distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity A random component with an average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Note Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz DISABLE Disabled Oo ENABLE Enabled 2610 USER Defines the first voltage point of the custom U f curve at the 19 of DEFINED U1 frequency defined by parameter 2677 USER DEFINED F1 Uy See section Custom Uff ratio on page 128 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2611 USER Defines the first frequency point of the custom U f curve 10 0 Hz DEFINED F1 000 600 0H2 Frequency O o O 2612 USER Defines the second voltage point of the custom U f curve at 38 of DEFINED U2 the frequency defined by parameter 2673 USER DEFINED Un F2 See section Custom U f ratio on p
162. ays be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Implementing the AC power line connection See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 314 Use a fixed connection to the AC power line WARNING As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3 5 mA a fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800 5 1 Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means Install a hand operated supply disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work 36 Planning the electrical installation E European union To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types e a switch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 e a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 e acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in acc
163. bebe eps one ees ses e aa 234 46 PUMP CLEANING 2c 92 4 26 si ro e aia eo ae e 235 32 PANEL CODI ua dde wat opaco dios ei id o doi dana en 236 DO EPB PROLOCOL cnscc ae244 drenidacn erica da abr dd eee deeds 237 64 LOAD ANALYZER giei iia E rabos ebrios Ei ia de pia 239 IPRC DON TROL nes zar it tap cde o init cion Si Oteo 242 IO OPTIONS cease es roo PAPES RUDA RAN tegen NO esa 259 g9 STARUP DATA 654 ue outro rio dir eto sii ro 260 13 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this Chapter contains 222 see 22262 A EE AAA cee AA A 263 SVSTOM OVEIVICW sigan ered Poe A Oa EEE PRES a Re eS em a 263 Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus 00005 265 Drive control parameters 0 eee eee eee eee 266 Fieldbus control interface 0 0 ce ne eee eee eee 268 Control Word and Status Word 0 0 0 ee eens 268 PRETEN ENG eS 2 52 mere oo ora Seo urbe SSG a SG ate Po Me Sere Se eo Bee Se Se ee 268 AGUA Valle stan cece cae cae kee Bon eRe eee ae ee Ree Bones eens e A 268 Fieldbus references circa e A bose es 269 Reference selection and correction 0 0 cece eee eee 269 Fieldbus reference scaling 0 00 ccc cece eee eee eee eee e eens 271 Reference handling eves vie eid Wh eke eae eee we Wt ee eee a i 272 ActUal Valde Scaling niu pct nod bo eni rE Os A ca a Domes AAA 272 MOdDUS MAPPIIN tarta set Beas eee ee arpas erstes iaa 273 Register Mapping ico 29 ai ra a a oe ee ia 273 FUNCI
164. bel The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ADD ACS310 03E 09A7 4 1 IP20 UL Open type 2 POUT INTUTE DETTE TTT TTT TET S N MYYWWRXXXX 4 kW 5 HP VOU UUUUUNTUTU ETT E ENTE TTT U1__3 380 480 V 3AUA0000039632 11 15 0 A f1 48 63 Hz U2 3 0 U1V 2 97A f2 0 500 Hz 1 Type designation see section Type designation key on page 27 Degree of protection by enclosure IP and UL NEMA Nominal ratings see section Ratings on page 308 4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX where M Manufacturer 08 09 10 for 2008 2009 2010 WW 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 R A B C for product revision number XXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 CE marking and C Tick C UL US and RoHS marks the label of your drive shows the valid markings Operation principle and hardware description 27 Type designation key The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the drive The first digits from the left express the basic configuration for example ACS310 03E 09A7 4 The optional selections are given after that separated by signs for example J404 The explanations of the type designation selections are described below ACS310 03E 09A7 4 J404 ACS310 product ser
165. below the set minimum limit NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT The drive trips on fault Al1 Al2 LOSS and the motor coasts 1 to stop Fault limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 AI1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT CONST SP7 The drive generates alarm Al1 Al2 LOSS and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 7208 CONST SPEED 7 Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 AI1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input signal is lost LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm Al1 Al2 LOSS and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 AI1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel ERR communication break FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS and the motor coasts to 1 stop CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 7208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to co
166. ble below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail ask es Page Control panels 71 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control e To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local control LOC shown on the left press Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE as appropriate before returning to the previous display The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 2 The result depends on how long you press the key e If you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 73 e If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings e To stop the drive in local cont
167. bus on page 265 MODBUS Embedded fieldbus Interface RS 232 ie control panel 10 RS232 connector See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265 Actual signals and parameters 261 All parameters No Name Value Description O 1 TI e m Ko 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language Note With the ACS CP D Assistant Control Panel the following languages are available English 0 Chinese 1 Korean 2 and Japanese 3 ENGLISH British English American English DEUTSCH German ITALIANO _ talan ESPA OL Spanish PORTUGUES Portuguese NEDERLANDS Dutch FRAN AIS French Dansk Danish suom Finnish SVENSKA Swedish RUSSKI Russian POLSKI Polish T RK E Turkish czech Czech MAGYAR Hungarian gJ y 9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro See chapter Application ABB MACRO macros on page 99 STANDA ABB Standard macro for constant speed applications STANDARD 3 WIRE 3 wire macro for constant speed applications ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse applications MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control applications HAND AUTO Hand Auto macro to be used when two control devices are 5 connected to the drive e Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT 1 e Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT2 EXT1 or EXT2 is active
168. ce 1 DI active O DI inactive DI2 Internal setpoint selected 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 1 0 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 0 1 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 DI2 3 See selection DI1 2 8 DI3 4 See selection DI1 2 E DI4 5 See selection DI1 2 TIMED FUNC 1 0 4077 INTERNAL SETPNT is used 1 4036 INTERNAL 15 SETPNT2 is used TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 ie TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED Selects with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 which FUN1 amp 2 internal setpoint is used as the reference 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Internal setpoint selected FUNC 1 FUNC 2 0 0 __A077 INTERNAL SETPNT A 0 A036 INTERNAL SETPNTZ 01 A037 INTERNAL SETPNTS en i 4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN ae 4102 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME a TIME 4103 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME a TIME 4104 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER FILTER 4105 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV VALUE INV 4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS MN 4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE MA 4108 0 VALUE See parameter 4008 0 VALUE 4109 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4110 ET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL a 4111 INTERNAL See parameter 4017 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT Actual signals and parameters 227 All parameters No Name Value
169. cee ee nenee oe ee eae cereuneeeee as 131 Supply phase 1056 vada e de ee en es a 131 Operation limits nananana eee eee eens 131 DOWNS since dk oE bio netic a stow hah ne Gas at eo ch a ee E a hate ee E te 131 POWe rN e eena o O eee oh ee a Oe eee og here Bates Se eee oes 131 AWOMAUC PTESCIS adsense 132 SSMS atc dace eu eee ed eae a hee ee nae ew aah ae aia 132 DUDECTVISIONS vo a a c 0 ade dk dc Rbk arty em abcd ehh Re a ie ida e 132 SONS a nice each teed Ae Rea AE A Ed ed BE Ee a a Ee 132 DINOS UCS cio ost tet tic do ee E tone de An dt hen ec ard a eve Aces ES 132 Ri e ernn ate o Beek aired ek E 132 SOMOS tarea teus Ch PATE hod eae eae ee Pte eed eee ea 132 PN COMIN greda wi eaii e dosh eer Gee 8 aa gus ea See Geos aS ae Be av ee oe Gee eee ee 133 Process COnIOUGr PID 2c5ud000s dee deed eee bee hae oe CREE EER Rees da 133 External Trim controller PID2 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 133 BOG de e se sek a trees sod os wien sl aed dre aan hare dh ep Note ed antes wae oe ah ee 134 SOMOS ia tere tetanus cur oleae vea Cnetnews AE pated Sao ee 136 DIAQNCSUCS apra ros RNA ea WER wee Oe aie rad Pelee 136 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control 1 2 0 2 0 0 ccc ee 137 Example AA 138 o er sek nee fea ek We etd ad en Aa id age ee ans A oe a nea ae 138 MOSS oo hh hoe se ie etree er a ee eet E a ea ei dhe a Pod ae eae a 139 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O 139 SOMOS oo0e4 weaned a ahaa a
170. celeration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application note that the ACS310 cannot be equipped with a brake resistor Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 0 1800 188 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2204 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 1 LINEAR 1 The function is deactivated during emergency stop LINEAR 0 0 Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or 1000 0 s deceleration and for slow ramps 0 1 1000 00 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between A rule of thumb A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1 5 Speed Linear ramp Par 2204 0 s NS S curve ramp Par 2204 gt 0s e mle E Par 2202 Par 2204 2205 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 2 ie the time required for the 60 0 s TIME 2 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ See par
171. ch gear for changing the drive s output power connections e parameter 8720 INTERLOCKS gt 0 Autochange is performed when e the running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV e the PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see the figure e Initiates a change when the running time since the last autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC input is below limit 8779 AUTOCHNG LEVEL e Stops the speed regulated motor e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor e Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors e Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor e Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was running Any other running motors are not interrupted e Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switch gear connects this motor to the drive power output e Delays motor start for time 8122 PFC START DELAY e Starts the speed regulated motor e Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation e Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autoc
172. cted input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set by parameter 4475 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires NOT SEL No digital input selected Oo Pump fan outlet pressure monitored through digital input DI1 4415 OUTLET CTRL Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 60 0 s DLY 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of high outlet pressure 0 1 1800 0s Delay time 4416 OUTLET This reference is used after detection of high outlet FORCED REF pressure See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference 001000 Forced reference O 4417 PID OUT DEC Pl controller ramp down time See selection PROTECT for 60 0 s TIME parameters 4407 INLET PROT CTRL and 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL 0 0 3800 0 s Delay time 4418 APPL Parameters 4418 APPL PROFILE CTL to 4420 PROF NOT SEL PROFILE CTL LIMIT ON DLY provide the Application Profile protection feature based on long term monitoring of an internal status signal If the selected signal exceeds and remains above the supervision limit for a longer time than the set delay parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY the internal status signal PROFILE HIGH is set to 1 The signal can be directed to a relay output see parameter group 74 RELAY OUTPUTS NOT SEL Not selected CONTROL Signal 0726 PID 1 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to DEV1 parameter
173. ction detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed Program features 139 E Settings Additional information 9902 PID control activation 4022 4026 4030 4037 Sleep function settings 4122 4126 4130 4131 E Diagnostics Parameter Additionalinformation 1401 PID sleep PID sleep function status through RO1 status PID sleep function status through RO1 RO 1 mm PID sleep function status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only Alarm JAdditional information PID SLEEP Sleep mode Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I O terminals are used as the connection interface Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output One sensor Three sensors WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement e the I O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected
174. curs SUPRV1 Status according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 See selection SUPRV1 OVER UNDER SUPRV2 Status according to supervision parameters 3204 3206 10 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV2 OVER 11 UNDER SUPRV3 Status according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 12 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV3 OVER 13 UNDER AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency FAULT RST Fault Automatic reset after the autoreset delay See 15 parameter group 37 AUTOMATIC RESET FLT ALARM Fault or alarm EXT CTRL Drive is under external control 17 REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use 18 CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use See parameter group 12 19 CONSTANT SPEEDS REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost 0 i 1 OVERCURRENT Alarm Fault by overcurrent protection function OVERVOLTAGE Alarm Fault by overvoltage protection function DRIVE TEMP Alarm Fault by drive overtemperature protection function UNDERVOLTA Alarm Fault by undervoltage protection function GE Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal is lost Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal is lost MOTOR TEMP Alarm Fault by motor overtemperature protection function 27 See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT STALL Alarm Fault by stall protection function See parameter 3010 28 STALL FUNCTION PID SLEEP PID s
175. d l4y current given in section Ratings on page 308 If 150 output power is needed multiply current y by 1 5 See also section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Note Larger fuses must not be used Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings ACS310 gG UL Class T Supply Motor PE 600 V U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 x E U A A a AWG AWG mm AWG KA 26 30 60 10 6 10 60 10 Postear 28 35 60 10 6 40 60 10 0826482 63 60 100 8 10 8 100 8 roax34A1 2 60 80 160 6 16 6 160 6 Ca A a a A roax04as 4 16 15 25 12 15 14 25 12 rosx06a2 4 16 15 25 12 15 14 25 12 0313484 25 30 6o 10 6 10 60 10 OB 17A2 4 35 60 e 6 8 60 8 PO3x26a4 4 50 so 100 8 10 8 100 8 P03x 34at 4 80 80 160 6 16 6 160 6 00578903 xls D Technical data 311 Dimensions weights and free space requirements E Dimensions and weights Frame Dimensions and weights size IP20 cabinet UL open H1 H2 H3 W B Weight in in in kg Ib in in mm mm mm mm m
176. danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged All ELV extra low voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding ie within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding Note Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 Safety 17 E General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment The drive is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for replacement Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to malfunction Ensure sufficient cooling Safe start up and operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation start up or operate the drive E General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equ
177. ds 0 0 1000 0 s Forward step duration 4606 REV TIME Defines the duration of each reverse step in the pump 0 0s cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0s Reverse step duration 1 1 0 1s 1 1 0 1s 4607 TRIG TIME Defines the time for setting TIMER TRIG of parameter 4607 0 0 h PUMP CLEAN TRIG 0 0 200 0 h Trigger time in hours 1 0 1h 4608 COUNT Number of steps to be performed in the pump cleaning sequence 000 Number oie 15201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line 238 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value ZESCNPMON Def FbEq 5202 BAUD RATE_ Defes the tansier rate ofthe ink e6 sewi fosei 19 2 kbit s must be used in all on line stations BNONE1 No parity bit one stopbit O ia a MESSAGES normal operation this number increases constantly 5205 PARITY Number of characters with a parity error received from the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the parity settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 5206 FRAME Number of characters with a framing error received by the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the communication speed settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters
178. e output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8703 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8703 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8703 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 244 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8104 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process 0 0 reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8105 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8109 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor 1 The first auxiliary motor starts if e no auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency exceeds limit 8709 1 Hz e output frequency stays above a relaxed limit 8109 1 Hz for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D After the first auxiliary motor starts output frequency decreases by value 81709 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ
179. e Hare ee wR Ses oR ewe Reforming the capacitors 0 0 ccc eee eee ne da daadaa Power GCOmMeCIONS lt 222 2200 deee eed soe hee REER atar AAA COMUOLDANG 242 5 83a ecards nh oct oral eee be Artieda heed aay Cleaning the control panel 0 0 cc eee eee eens Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel o ooooo LED ees sess hac a tse ig ceca dev E A dete erase se fared derses asecae sere 16 Technical data What this chapter contains 2 0 0 0 0 ce eee eens RC Uc ite eee eee eee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eer ee eee ee rl e E E wi watig acdsee wen Aeon ee eae SIZING 4444665105 bea A nh E babes Stee E T E run sau ae eo Leake ee be Dera fxs wens eaten oe ee ee Poe hones ee eat we Ghee ae wad Power cable sizes and fuses o o o oocooo eee eee eens Dimensions weights and free space requirements 0 0 00 cee eee eee DIMENSIONS and weights gaa ei wether e lec Free space requirements 0 0 eee ee eee ees Losses cooling data and noise 2 222 ece2540e8ee Roe dee bs SHEE DEPRESS RES OSE ee RS Losses and cooling data 0 cc eee eee e eens NOISE seareiro ier ces eden dence s tess Babee daa eee aaa ce a eee Terminal and lead through data for the power cables 0 0 00 cece eee Terminal and lead through data for the control cables o ooooooo Electric power network specification nanasa eae ee eee eee MOtorCONR CUON dat
180. e I O terminals Tightening torque is 0 4 N m 3 5 lbf in J701 X1C X1A X1B 1 SCR 17 ROCOM 2 Alt 18 RONC 3 GND 19 RONO 4 10V 20 DOSRC 5 Al2 21 DOOUT 6 GND 22 DOGND 7 AO 8 GND X1C 9 24V 23 SCR 10 GND 24 B 11 DCOM 25 A 12 DI 26 GND_A J701 Connects 120 ohm termination resistor See page 13 DI2 54 14 DI3 1 Selects voltage or current as the signal types for 15 DI4 analog inputs Al1 and Al2 16 DI5 digital or frequency input Voltage and current selection for analog inputs Switch S1 selects voltage 0 2 10 V 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA 20 20 mA as the signal types for analog inputs Al1 and Al2 The factory settings are unipolar voltage for Al1 0 2 10 V and unipolar current for Al2 0 4 20 mA which correspond to the default usage in the application macros The switch is located to the left of I O terminal 9 see the I O terminal figure above S1 E Top position 0 4 20 mA default for Al2 or 20 20 mA H m Bottom position U 0 2 10 V default for Al1 or 10 10 V o lt lt 50 Electrical installation Voltage and current connection for analog inputs Bipolar voltage 10 10 V and current 20 20 mA are also possible If a bipolar connection is used instead of a unipolar one see section Programmable analog inputs on page 120 for how to set parameters accordingly Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar Bipola
181. e Value Description Def FbEq PTC The function is active The temperature is supervised using 4 PTC sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tref as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it into ohms The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature Noma 0 15kohm 1 2 4 5 THERM 0 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive via a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a digital input 0 motor overtemperature THERM 1 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive via a normally open thermistor relay connected to a digital input 1 motor overtemperature 3502 INPUT Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement AI1 SELECTION signal Analog input Al1 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Analog input Al2 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Digital input DI1 Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 DI2 Digital input DIZ Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE v
182. e digital and analog inputs when e the motor start up is performed and e the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired See section Default I O according to the connection diagram given for the oo diagram on page ABB Standard macro Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key In remote control the panel to switch between remote and local control display shows text REM Start by switching digital input DI1 on Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast ned 00 nz and stops after the setpoint is reached OUTPUT FWD Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating lt is dotted until the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input Al1 REM 5 00 HZ OUTPUT FWD Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating 66 Start up and control with I O Control panels 67 Control panels What this chapter contains The chapter describes the control panel keys LED indicators and display fields It also instruct
183. e effective All parameters No Name Value DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 INTERNAL SUPRV1 OVER SUPRV2 OVER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 11 OVER DI INV Actual signals and parameters 221 Description Def FbEq Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV The function is activated when parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM stays over the high limit defined by parameter 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective See selection SUPRV1 OVER 10 The function is activated deactivated through inverted digital 1 input DI1 1 deactivation O activation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective uu SUPRV2 The function is activated when parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM stays below the low limit defined by parameter 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective ENE See selection SUPRV1 UNDER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UND
184. e for the local lock ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 283 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV Local lock through inverted digital input DI1 Rising edge of 1 inverted digital input DI1 Local control allowed Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 Local control disabled av See selection DA INV b CN E E osav See selection DI INY 6 1607 RAM SAVE Saves the valid values to the permanent memory Note A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection DONE Saving completed O SAVE Saving in progress Actual signals and parameters 179 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1608 START Selects the source for the Start Enable 1 signal NOT SEL ENABLE 1 Note Functionality of the Start Enable signal is different from the Run Enable signal Example External damper control application using Start Enable and Run Enable Motor can start only after the damper is fully open Drive started Start Stop command group 10 7 Start Enable A signals 1608 and 1609 Relay Relay energized Started de output status energize group 14 Damper open Damper i Damper
185. e timed start stop control for 1001 1002 external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control 1102 Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201 Selecting timed function status indicated 1401 through relay output RO Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 4027 control Program features 115 Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start up Assistant Main displays and the information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents Main display Information display LOC UPAR EDIT LOC UHELP Set exactly as given 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT on the motor N nameplate If_connected to multiple motors EXIT 00 00 SAVE EXIT 00 00 1 Parameter Help text 2 Feed in field help text continued Local control vs external control The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs Embedded fieldbus enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with DriveWindow Light PC tool can also control the drive Local control Drive External control g Embedded fieldbus Modbus RTU heres Control panel or PC tool ae St
186. eases a value if a parameter is selected e Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode e Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive 7 DIR Changes the direction of the motor rotation STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control 70 Control panels E Operation You operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the CA and ty V arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the 37 key With the CZ key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes Output Reference Parameter Copy and Fault The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the REM A 91 ne direction switch between local and remote control and ouTPuT FWD monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks The ta
187. ects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution E Category C2 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual Technical data 319 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 Motor cable length maximum 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required E Category C3 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 second environment see page 378 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The internal EMC filter is connected the metal screw at EMC is in place or the optional EMC f
188. ed 2 for alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started 8124 ACC IN AUX _ Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum NOT SEL STOP frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp e applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off e replaces the acceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies fouT A A speed regulated motor accelerating using group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 Not selected 1 0 1s 0 1 1800 0s 0 1 1800 s Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 260 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8125 DEC IN AUX Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero NOT SEL START frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on replaces the deceleration ramp defined in grou
189. ed Functions Protections Output Signals HAND AUTO Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals PID CONTROL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules PID Control Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals PFC CONTROL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals SPFC CONTROL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals Program features 113 E List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Setparameters Language Select Selecting the language 9901 Motor Set up Setting the motor data 9905 9909 Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option Modules Activating the option modules Speed Control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed output frequency reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the frequency limits Set
190. ee ed ee ee wae ES 24 Power connections and control interfaces 0 0 ces 25 Type designation label oscar ai bbe bere eee en ad 26 Type designalion Key cies debe een bee ee ee ee bee eee ee Be eee eee ee eee 27 4 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains lt 2 lt lt 2 2i ccecgeds nde crea de aaa Keds 29 Checking the installation site 0 ee ee eee eens 29 Requirements for the installation site 0 2 0 eee 29 REQUIRE TOONS cistitis eee dee dees ow ods 30 o enor a see sa ces erro ar we eo ew E Warr E arte Gr ra Gre eh Ore wary Gey he Ge we Brees eee 31 Checking the delivery corsario ll de ac oro dr drid 31 A ee he ea eee OSE ee he eh 32 Install the drive 2 24 cceniccdeteceraa cde eddadeed deed AER e 32 Fasten clamping plates iones cond eas cde Gece a a a 34 5 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains 20 saaa aaa aaea ee ee eee eee 35 6 Table of contents Implementing the AC power line connection 0 0 cc eee 35 Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means o 35 jos 0 b 24 246254250 66a ncwen en des ecu ees bus oan ee ted See Gans Bed s4 36 Sia o sessir G68 oo ech eres Be te ace Gh he he a Oe ae et Oh ew ce dew 36 Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive 000 ce 36 Selecting the power cables 0 ccc teen eee teen e nee 36 General TUES aeea quito ei eee Bees E da Be aoe od eee Oe AE RS OES C
191. ee ee dee GEM ead 127 A A Saves are deh a ee E ae Gre Hee tee E ee i ae ee ae 127 CUSTOM TANG esras onde yea ob ne ee eee be Gun dp tees amen Edad ds 6 128 SOMOS sea daw ee ee each re ee ed 128 DIAGNOSUGSs sos ated tbs sai debo ee heed a eed os RERA ae 128 IRCOMPENSAUON 2440406 rt aed af ode E a Dad wae See dw eRe a Paes ea ae 129 SS MINS 2 0 ghee te dass we ee o ge ae Ghee ac See Pe Sh Ssh Sse hese gh actuaries 129 Programmable protection functions 0 0 00 ee eens 129 PIMs io ai rh eee eee eee eae nee o ato 129 Palle LOSE servo scenti eat oe es eo eee Ra oe ee eee bee be ea 129 External PAW itis 6d oe eh es he we ee ee a es oR eS eh ee 129 Stal Proteco 5 5 ge S oe sat Sin ee dein Be ese aia eh Side it Soeedee Sree Ri dcw By oe we hates are cerere ee 129 Motor Thermal Protection 0 0 00 130 Ealit Fault PIovecuon ascos 640 408 eee be bas Bee Gabe woeweet essen es 130 NAC ORRS CU WING isc 8 o a tor Ack A hs ee a E 130 Preprogrammed faults cuco sisi cack owed cia Sara wise ho as ec weak ooo date Aree walk od racy de 131 Overcurrent 0 0 cc eee eee eee eee eee 131 Bor o cerier dire aad and ema ne a ene i bk wet eb ceded Ba ae abe lk SG 131 OC undervolage serer a o Keon aiden abated Pee Ph cto Je ale Reon he 131 DAVE temperate ricreatore tntto EAn kee ee Wes A Ree ee RA Ree ene 131 MON CIRC UNE a tee ago Ais ao erat er ree eo ee ees eae ee ere ee ere rece ed 131 Wema Taul 2rtnc cee euscenec ned need em
192. eference is defined by parameter 1105 when REF 1 is active and by parameter 1708 when REF2 is active When par 4232 PID2 OUTPUT the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 2008 value E Settings Additional information 1102 REF 1 2 selection 4230 4232 Trimming function settings 4201 4229 PID control settings Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits 120 Program features E Example The drive runs a conveyor line It is soeed controlled but the line tension also needs to be taken into account If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint the speed will be slightly decreased and vice versa To accomplish the desired speed correction the user e activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to it e tunes the trimming to a suitable level Speed controlled conveyor line Drive rollers pull Tension measurement Simplified block diagram Add Output frequency l reference Trimmed output frequency reference Tension measurement Tension setpoint Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog voltage current inputs The inputs can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The update cycle for the analog input is 8 ms 12 ms cycle once per second The cycle time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 8 ms gt 2 ms E Settings Paramete
193. ent of maximum current 0 0 TO40 30 40 distribution 00 100 SSS 6418 AL1RANGE40 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO50 40 50 distribution TA SSCS 6419 AL1RANGES5O Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO60 50 60 distribution 00 100 SSS 6420 AL1RANGE60 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO70 60 70 distribution 00 100 SSCS 6421 AL1RANGE70 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO80 70 80 distribution TA O OT 6422 AL1RANGE80 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO90 80 90 distribution 00 100 SSS 6423 AL1RANGE90 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 T 90 100 distribution 1 0 1 O TA O OT 6424 AL2RANGEOT Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 10 0 0 10 distribution wa oS o 0 1 O 0 0 100 6425 AL2RANGE10 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO20 10 20 distribution 0 0 100 w OOOO ia 6426 AL2RANGE20 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO30 20 30 distribution Actual signals and parameters 243 All parameters No Name Value ee ae 100 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 1 ee AL2RANGE30 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter EE O EEES TO40 30 40 da TA EN 6428 AL2RANGE40 Amplitude logger
194. eration time 2203 and auxiliary motor stop delay 8776 parameters See also section SPFC Control macro on page 109 E Settings Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of motors Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Pump protection pressure monitoring settings Group 81 PFC CONTROL PFC control settings E Diagnostics Alarm A AAA OUTLET HIGH OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan outlet too high HIGH Additional information PAR PFC REF NEG 2007 lt 0 PAR PFC IO 1 Not enough relays parameterized for PFC Conflict between group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 and parameter 8178 PAR PFC IO 2 Parameter 8127 does not match the PFC motors in group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 PAR PFC IO 3 Allocation of a digital input interlock for each PFC motor not possible INLET LOW INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan inlet too low OUTLET HIGH OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan outlet too high 148 Program features Actual signals and parameters 149 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal parameter It also contains a table of the default values for the different macros Note When the control panel is in the short parameter view ie when parameter 7677 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 SHORT VIEW the control panel only shows a subset
195. erload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to the drive The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature measurement function further by parameters The most common temperature sensors are e motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch for example Klixon e motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or Pt100 For more information on the thermal model see section Motor Thermal Protection on page 730 For more information on the temperature measurement function see section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 139 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive ACS310 03x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type B Other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact such as separation from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by a transformer can also be applied Implementing a bypass connection WARNING Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connec
196. ernates between pumps to keep the duty times of the pumps equal Interlocks function enables the drive to detect if any of the pumps are unavailable eg switched off for maintenance in which case the next available pump is started instead The drive controls the motor of pump 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump 2 and pump 3 etc The drive switches pump 2 and then pump 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The drive PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC a
197. eted and retry because drive is performing task 5085 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive types source to destination drive are same ie ACS310 See the type designation has failed label of the drive 5086 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive type source to destination drive designations are the same See type has failed designation labels of the drives 294 Fault tracing ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible 5088 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of drive memory error ee Download has failed Contact your local ABB AAA e eae of CRC error 5090 Download has failed ae your local ABB representative because of data processing error 5091 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of parameter error Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible Fault tracing 295 Fault messages generated by the drive CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0001 0002 0003 0004 0006 0007 0008 OVERCURRENT 2310 0305 bit 0 DC OVERVOL
198. eter 34719 OUTPUT3 UNIT PAR FWD minimum and maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and ai 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 5 0 0 0 iS OUTPUT1 MAX PAR FWD Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3474 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the 0 0 HZ 76 Control panels E Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can do the following Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download All This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive dL P Download Partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 160
199. etwork using embedded fieldbus Fault tracing page 287 tells how to reset faults and view fault history It lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Maintenance and hardware diagnostics page 303 contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Technical data page 307 contains technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Dimensions page 323 shows dimension drawings of the drive Introduction to the manual 21 e Further information inside of the back cover page 333 tells how to make product and service inquiries get information on product training provide feedback on ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet Related documents See List of related manuals on page 2 Categorization by frame size The ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 To identify the frame size of your drive see the table in section Ratings on page 308 22 Introduction to the manual Quick installation and commissioning flowchart Task See Identify the frame size of your drive RO R4 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation key on page 27 Technical data Ratings on page 308
200. ew backup information Parameter Backup How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals I O Settings 98 82 Control panels How to get help Press 2 to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys CAS and Cw After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing 7 How to find out the panel version LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UHELP This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and EXIT 00 00 LOC UHELP external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes EXIT 00 00 LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY STOP DIR LO START 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL Ew If the power is switched on switch it off i a Keep key pressed down while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following panel information Panel SW panel firmware version ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the C key the panel goes to the Output mode PANEL VERSION INFO Panel Sw X XX Rom CRC XXXXXXXXXX Flash Rev X XX XXXXXXXXXXX
201. f the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 5308 EFB UART Number of messages with a character error received by the ERRORS drive te FF ir ata ny RO EFB protocol is nitializing TIME OUT A time out has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol CONFIG EFB protocol has a configuration error ERROR OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT 4 addressed to this drive ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to 5 this drive 240 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 6 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register a 40005 05553 5311 EFB PAR 11 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register a 40006 0 65535 5312 EFB PAR 12 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register _ 40007 IIA N EFB PAR 13 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register gt 40008 065535 5314 EFB PAR 14 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register SS 40009 0 65535 5315 EFB PAR 15 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register a 40010 0 65535 5316 EFB PAR 16 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register o 400
202. faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fault is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink 62 Start up and control with I O E How to perform a guided start up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use the Start up Assistant Press 3 when is highlighted to run the Start up Assistant EXIT Press 7 if you do not want to run the Start up Assistant Press key 2 to highlight NE and then press s if you want to make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the Start up Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to the drive If you decided to run the Start up Assistant the display then asks you to select the language Scroll to the desired language with keys caN CvV and SAVE press 7 to accept EXIT If you press 77 the Start up Assistant is stopped The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks starting with the motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on
203. for the drive output frequency 0 0 Hz A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Note MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ f 2007 value is gt 0 Allowed frequency range 2008 value is lt 0 frequency range Allowed frequency range 500 0 500 0 Hz Minimum frequency 1 0 1 Hz 2008 Maa Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency 7 50 0 Hz U 60 0 Hz 0 0 ew 0 Hz Maximum rearen 2101 START Selects the motor ET method AUTO FUNCTION AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency If flying start is required use selection SCAN START DC MAGN The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before 2 the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC MAGN is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed even if the motor magnetization is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque 184 Actual signals and parameters All parameters o Name Value Description Def FbEq TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break away 4 torque is required The drive pre magnetizes the mo
204. g electrodes Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential 40 Planning the electrical installation A diagram of the cable routing is shown below Motor cable Drive Bawereanie min 300 mm 12 in Motor cable Input power cable min 200 mm 8 in 90 min 500 mm 20 in Control cables E Control cable ducts 24V 230V 24V 230V Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is separate ducts inside the cabinet insulated for 230 V or insulated with an insulation sleeving for 230 V Planning the electrical installation 41 Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload E Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines Circuit diagram Short circuit protection Distribution Input cable Drive Protect the drive and input board cable with fuses or a circuit breaker See WA q footnotes 1 and 2 AE 1 Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 307 The fuses will protect the input cable in short circuit situations restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive 2 Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used Fuses must be
205. ge in case of incorrect direction of rotation Note By default parameter 7677 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 SHORT VIEW and you cannot see all actual signals and parameters To be able to view them set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW 58 Start up and control with I O e Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page 55 How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have if any e Ifyou have no control panel follow the instructions given in section How to start up the drive without a control panel on page 58 e If you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 e Ifyou have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform a guided start up on page 62 or perform a manual start up see section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 The Start up Assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the manual start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 E How to start up the drive without a control panel Apply input power and wait for a moment Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Start up and control
206. gement Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products For fulfilling the requirements of the standard see section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 378 RoHS marking The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that drive follows the provisions of the European RoHS Directive RoHS the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Liability limits The manufacturer is not responsible for Technical data e Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation e Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident e Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties Patent protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 654 624 6 175 256 6 313 599 6 552 510 6 859 374 6 972 976 7 034 510 7 084 604 7 215 099 7 274 573 7 372 696 D512 026 D548 183
207. h the peak value was detected Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 408 PEAK TIME 2 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 6409 CURRENT AT Current at the moment of the peak value PEAK 00 888 5 A OOOO O O 410 UDC AT PEAK DC voltage at the moment of the peak value 0 65535 V 6411 FREQ AT Output frequency at the moment of the peak value PEAK 0 0 6553 5 Hz 6412 TIME OF Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 RESET 1 242 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 65535 d Day of the last reset 1 1d Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 6413 TIME OF Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 00 00 00 RESET 2 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 6414 AL1RANGEOT Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 010 0 10 distribution 0 0 0 1 0 100 0 1 0 1 6415 AL1RANGE10 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO20 10 20 distribution TA SSCS OT 6416 AL1RANGE20 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO30 20 30 distribution 0 0 O 0 1 0 100 0 1 0 1 6417 AL1RANGE30 Amplitude logger 1 current in perc
208. hange e Continues with normal PFC operation 252 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PID output 8122 8118 8118 B A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL autochange not allowed B Autochange occurs 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Starting order counter The operation of the starting order counter e The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and 1410 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on e Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc e The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor e The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on e f the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK e When the drive power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory e If the PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset according to parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 Actual signal
209. he Heo RE 36 Alternative power cable types 0 0 0 eee eens 37 Motor cable Shield 222 4 0200652eccheneeeendr sce eteogdoeteteeeeeeden eas 37 Additional US requirements 0 00 ccc eee eens 38 Selecting the control cables 0 0 0 ccc eee eee ee een eens 38 General TUES ess cece die ais ow otk que ede yea Woe Hoe ee he Gee a 38 REY CADIE psaras iuan et oh do Sein hese ym en Ee ne ke Sa hcp Wy tec eck cars ae ek ce ee 39 Cone altel Cable ue a a contara ae hed ook a Ce ee ooh Eee ee Ae eee eee 39 ROUNO ING CADIS scr woh hd ah Ac tw eh Ach atresia hace tie da era arden 39 Control cable dUC S 2 2222 2054 60d e50e arras rasa ee oH Shee OS 40 Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload sico cine ek is ea ee eee Rk A ee eR ae 41 Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations 41 Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations 41 Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload 42 Protecting the motor against thermal overload oo o ooocoooocoooooo ooo 42 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive oo ooooooooooooo o 42 Implementing a bypass connection o o ooocooooo eee eee 42 Protecting the contacts of relay outputs 0 0 0 0c es 43 6 Electrical installation What this chapter contains
210. he drive trips on fault Al1 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1301 MINIMUM Alf 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 3022 Al2 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al2 If parameter 3007 0 1 LIMIT AI lt MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al2 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and ENABLE motor cable connection is detected ie the input power cable is connected to the motor connection of the drive Note Changing this parameter setting is not recommended in normal use The protection is to be disabled only with corner grounded delta power systems and very long cables Actual signals and parameters 199 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DISABLE ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING 3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 3702 TRIAL TIME If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped The drive must be reset from control panel or from a
211. he second overload curve 300 HIGH 2 definition point 0 600 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition 43 Hz point Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0 500 Hz 3711 LOAD TORQ _ Defines the torque value of the third underload curve 25 LOW 3 definition point Must be smaller than 3772 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 3712 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the third overload curve 300 HIGH 3 definition point 0 600 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve 50 Hz definition point Must be smaller than 3776 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz 3714 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve 30 LOW 4 definition point Must be smaller than 3775 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 3715 LOAD TORQ _ Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve 300 HIGH 4 definition point 0 600 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of the fifth load curve definition 500 Hz point 0 500 He 3717 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve 30 LOW 5 definition point Must be smaller than 3778 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 3718 LOAD TORQ _ Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition 300 HIGH 5 point 0 600 A OC Pr ss PID PID1 tro ameter set I 4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller Great gain 11 0 may cause speed oscillation Actual signals and parameters 215 All parameters N
212. hrough 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 269 Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control 1604 FAULT Enables fault reset through fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 RESET SEL 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 1606 LOCAL COMM Local control mode lock signal rm bit LOCK oo 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 1607 PARAM Saves parameter value changes SAVE including those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 1608 START COMM Inverted Start Enable 1 Start Disable 40032 bit ENABLE 1 eas 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 1609 START COMM Inverted Start Enable 2 Start Disable 40032 bit ENABLE 2 T 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 19 2201 ACC DEC COMM ACC DEC ramp pair selection bit 1 2 SEL i 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 2209 RAMP COMM cans input to zero through 0307 FB 40001 bit 6 i bit INPUT O CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DRV 3018 COMM NOT SEL Determines drive action in case 43018 FAULT FUNC FAULT fieldbus communication is lost CONST SP 7 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM 0 1 60 0 s Defines the time between FAULT TIME communication loss detection and the action selected with parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV 4010 4110 4210 COMM PID control reference REF2
213. iary voltage output common m pcom Digital input common 12 DH Stop 0 Start 1 Hand X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 1e ronc PFC 8 19 RONO Digital output max 100 mA E No fault Fault 1 1 Hand 0 10 V gt 0 50 Hz 3 The signal source must be powered PID PFC 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp Application macros 109 SPFC Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control SPFC applications with a soft start function To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 15 SPFC CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 151 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF E Default I O connections X1A raft sR Sina cate sess 2 At 10 Reterencevoiage 10 VDC max 70ma D 5 m2 Process actual value 4 20mA EL GN rat nat cemon D 7 a0 Output frequency value 0 20mA L 118 Jend Analog output circuit common 9 240 ni volage output 24 V DG max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiary voltage output common 11 pcom bigaliputcommen 12 Dr
214. ieldbus equivalent lt sesss064e60500 te S00 8005 e nee ER eee eS 150 Default values with different macros 0 0 ccc eee ees 151 Actual signals in the short parameter view 0 00 eee 152 OA FAULT TANS ORY serep secede ced a at nd da Riana acer oS do and wai en 152 Parameters in the short parameter VIEW 2 6 eee eens 152 REFERENCE SELECT enana reno Reb cerns eens RoR ee aes Sera 152 IZ CONSTANT SPEEDS 2420224400455 4056 se GS oe 806 548 e Sees eo OS bed eee 152 ee GIN PU Scion trad oo ee Ee ee ee ee eb eens 152 TA RELAY OUTPUTS vecindades de ri ii oe boo eee ees 152 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS s ezscesiossraranis ee be ds dab a eee e AA 152 nn E arenes seeded or el ard see Pe ed he Steed eet a 152 2 AR ONO asun reso retro oe be hee redes pan 152 PZ AGOELDES us oia eee ee ee ee a A Ara acen 153 IS TARIRUPIDA DA romina dia das eee eee 153 All actual signals 220 0 ria o a e e e A e 154 OMOPERATING DATA sesxrsueriats daria de as dd e bs da 154 US FB ACTUAL SIGNALS usario Ste bd ek doe a hos hee is ral aa 156 OF Freeh PUSTOR soreer ena prat orita ah oat tees paa daa 159 Ms y 2222 4 eb seek eens anene ces ot E en esas anres etbeecaewe ved sen 161 1O SEAR To rOPJOIRG patos 62t 4 non Mee oe ao ee othe bore Mae oe ae eee oe ee 161 Ml REFERENCE SELECT stes ave deer bus tee Poe ee eed Sees dee eS 163 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 2 2 2 0 eee 167 IS ANALOGINPUTS cameras Sees wand ware od ote Seach Bde eke a 170 14 RELAY OUTPUTS t
215. ies O o 3 phase 03 3 phase input Configuration E EMC filter connected 50 Hz frequency U EMC filter disconnected 60 Hz frequency Output current rating In format xxAy where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part eg O9A7 means 9 7 A For more information see section Ratings on page 308 Input voltage range 200 240 VAC 380 480 VAC N ion J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel 1 J400 ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel 2 R700 ACS310 User s Manual in English 3AUA0000044201 EN R701 ACS310 User s Manual in German 3AUA0000048396 DE R702 ACS310 User s Manual in Italian 3AUA0000048398 IT R707 ACS310 User s Manual in French 3AUA0000048400 FR R708 ACS310 User s Manual in Spanish 3AUA0000048401 ES 1 The ACS310 is compatible with ACS CP C Basic Control Panel Rev M or later 2 The ACS310 is compatible with ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel Rev E or later new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX where year YY 07 or greater and revision R E F G The ACS310 is compatible with ACS CP D Assistant Control Panel Rev P or later Unlike the other panels the ACS CP D is ordered with a separate material code 28 Operation principle and hardware description Mechanical installation 29 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery
216. iggering some drive functionality start stop sleep pump cleaning The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level E Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 1001 1002 EXT1 EXT2 start stop according to supervision functions 1401 Supervision status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Supervision status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Supervision status through DO 4022 4122 Sleep start according to supervision functions 4601 Pump clean trigger according to supervision functions Program features 133 Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock E Settings Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE PID control There are two built in PID controllers in the drive e Process PID PID1 and e External Trim PID PID2 The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based on process variables such as pressure flow or temperature When the PID control is activated a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The drive compares the reference and the actual values and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference The control operates on a 2 ms time level E Process control
217. ilter is installed 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 With the internal EMC filter motor cable length 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive UL marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements E UL checklist Input power connection See section Electric power network specification on page 314 Disconnecting device disconnecting means See Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means on page 35 Ambient conditions The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 316 for specific limits 320 Technical data Input cable fuses
218. in 100 ohm 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 10 V 1 max 10 mA R lt 10 kohm 0 1 11 0 4 20 mA load lt 500 ohm 24 V DC 10 max 200 mA 12 24 V DC with internal or external supply PNP and NPN Pulse train 0 16 kHz X1A 16 only 2 4 kohm NO NC 250 VAC 30 VDC 0 5A 30V DC 5A 230 VAC 2 A rms Transistor output PNP 30 V DC 100 mA 30 V DC short circuit protected 10 Hz 16 kHz 1 Hz 0 2 Shielded twisted pair impedance 100 150 ohm Trunk line drop lines allowed Bus interface isolated from the drive 1 2 76 8 kbit s Serial asynchronous half duplex Modbus Approximately 95 to 98 at nominal power level depending on the drive size and options Degrees of protection IP20 cabinet installation UL open Standard enclosure The drive must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding from contact IP20 NEMA 1 Achieved with an option kit including a hood and a connection box 316 Technical data Ambient conditions Installation site altitude O to 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level above 1000 m 3300 ft see section Derating on page 09 Air temperature Relative humidity Contamination levels IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 2 IEC 60721 3 1 Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60721 3 3 Shock IEC 60068 2 27 ISTA 1A Environmental limits for the drive are given below The drive is to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment
219. inal current rating If present an A indicates a decimal point eg 9A7 means 9 7 A Y 2 200 V 4 400 V Z i European loading package n US loading package firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys As and Cw EXIT Press EZ to return to the Par Backup menu Control panels 97 Display LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 PLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UBACKUP INFO DRIVE TYPE ACS310 3304 DRIVE RATING 9A741 3301 FIRMWARE EXIT 00 00 LOC UBACKUP INFO ACS310 3304 DRIVE RATING 9A741 3301 FIRMWARE 241A hex EXIT 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL 98 Control panels E 1 0 Settings mode In the I O Settings mode you can e check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal e edit the parameter setting For example if 1103 REF1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT has value Al1 you can change its value to eg Al2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to Alf e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals
220. ination resistor RS 232 Plug a communication cable into the control panel connection X2 The cable must be shorter than 3 meters Fieldbus controller Installation checklist 55 Installation checklist Checking the installation Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start up Go through the checklist below together with another person Read chapter Safety on page 75 of this manual before you work on the drive The ambient operating conditions are allowed See Mechanical installation Checking the installation site on page 29 as well as Technical data Losses cooling data and noise on page 312 and Ambient conditions on page 316 The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non flammable wall See Mechanical installation on page 29 The cooling air will flow freely See Mechanical installation Free space around the drive on page 30 The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start See Planning the electrical installation Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 36 as well as Technical data Motor connection data on page 314 For ungrounded and corner grounded systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected EMC screw removed The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year The drive is grounded properly The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power connections at U1 V1
221. intenance On the Internet go to http www abb com drives and select Drive Services Maintenance and Field Services 304 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Cooling fan The drive s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hours The actual life span depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature When the Assistant Control Panel is in use the Notice Handler Assistant informs when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached see parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG This information can also be passed to the relay output see parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 regardless of the used panel type Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts E Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 Only frame sizes R1 R4 include a fan frame size RO has natural cooling WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Remove the
222. ion here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Par Backup menu with keys 4 gt and S Y7 and press Sy The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press ES if you want to stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press y to return to the Par Backup menu Display LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UPAR BACKUP Copying parameters PENA mz A ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_ upload successful OK 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP Downloading parameters full set A E ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_download successful ly completed OK 00 00 How to view information about the backup E MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing s if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until you get to the Main menu Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys As and SY 7 and pressing Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup menu with keys a4 and SY 7 and press The display shows the following information about the drive where the backup was made DRIVE TYPE DRIVE RATING FIRMWARE type of the drive rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where XXX Nom
223. ipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur When activated these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use instead the control panel start and stop keys and or external commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors ie power ups by applying power is two per minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000 Note If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON the drive will start immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3 wire a pulse start stop When the control location is not set to local LOC not shown on the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel first press the LOC REM key and then the stop key CO gt 18 Safety Introduction to the manual 19 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes applicability target audience and purpose of this manual It describes the contents of this manual and refers to a li
224. is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The inverter modulates motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart 0 0 60 0 s Delay time If parameter value is set to zero zero speed 1 0 1s delay function is disabled 2113 START DELAY Defines the start delay After the conditions for start have 0 00 s been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start methods If start delay is zero the delay is disabled During the start delay alarm START DELAY is shown 0 0 60 0s a time 2201 ACCIDEC 1 2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal SEL that selects between the two ramp pairs acceleration deceleration pair 1 and 2 Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202 2204 Ramp par 2 is defined by parameters 2205 2207 NOT SEL Ramp pair Tis used O MO Digital input DI1 1 ramp pair 2 O ramp pair 1 Ho ba Ses selection DR All parameters No Name Value COMM DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O ramp pair 2 1 ramp pair 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV i DI3 INV DI4 INV See selecti
225. isters 4X references in a slave 03 device 06 Preset single 4X Presets a value into a single register 4X reference When 06 register broadcast the function presets the same register reference in all attached slaves Read Write 4X Performs a combination of one read operation and one write registers operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus transaction Write operation is performed before the read operation 10 Preset multiple 4X Presets values into a sequence of registers 4X references When 16 registers broadcast the function presets the same register references in all attached slaves 23 Note In the Modbus data message register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx 1 For example register 40002 is addressed as 0001 E Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The drive supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table Code Name Description C o 0 Illegal Function Unsupported command Illegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read write protected Message is too long Parameter write is not allowed when start is active Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is selected f 03 Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive Value is outside minimum or maximum limits Parameter is read only Drive parameter 5378 EFB PAR 18 holds the most recent exception code 278 Fieldbus control
226. ive is modulating Counter cannot be kh reset 0141 MWH MWAH counter Counter cannot be reset 1 1 COUNTER MWh 0142 REVOLUTION Motor revolution counter millions of revolutions The 1 counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons Mrev simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0143 DRIVE ON Drive control board power on time in days Counter cannot 1 1 TIME HI be reset days 0144 DRIVE ON Drive control board power on time in 2 second ticks 30 1 2s TIME LO ticks 60 seconds Counter cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature Unit depends on the sensor 1 1 type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 0158 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 VALUE 1 0159 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 VALUE 2 0160 DI 1 5 STATUS Status of digital inputs Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off 0161 PULSE INPUT Value of frequency input in Hz 1 1 Hz FREQ 156 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1 1 RO is energized 0 RO is de 1 1 energized 0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output when transistor output is used as 1 1 a digital output 0164 TO Transistor output frequency when transistor output is used 1 1 Hz FREQUENCY as a frequency output 0173 RO 2 4 Status of the relays in the Relay O
227. k transitions due to daylight saving changes Go to the Main menu by pressing Dl if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until you get to the Main menu LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME amp DATE on the menu with keys A 5 and SY 7 and pressing LOC UTIME DATE 1 LOCK VISIBILITY EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY Loc CLOCK VISIB 1 on the menu press SS select Show clock Hide clock and press or if you want to return to the Hide cloc previous display w out making changes press 7 EXIT 00 00 SEL e To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on Loc DATE FORMAT 1 the menu press s ar and select a suitable format da Press SI to save or EP to cancel your changes CANCEL 00 00 OK e To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on LOC TIME FORMAT 1 the menu press Y 2 and select a suitable format i Press xs to save or EP to cancel your changes 12 hour CANCEL 00 00 SEL 94 Control panels Display e To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and LOC SET TIME press Sy Specify the hours with keys lt 4 and xx and press wr Then specify the minutes Press ANCEL asl to save or EP to cancel your changes To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press 3 Specify the first pa
228. l allons per minute cubic feet per minute oot millions of gallons per day V Hz S h rom kh C mA mV kW W kWh F hp MWh m s bar kPa GPM PSI CFM ft MGD inHg inches of mercury eet per minute ilobytes per second A Actual signals and parameters 205 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ohm 33 pulses per minute a pulses per seconds liters per seconds liters per minute E Iters per hour o maim cubic meters per minute ao kols kiogramspersecen fa kgim Kiograms per minute fe kgih Kiograms per hour mbar mida ooo psa SSS e GPS galonspersecon e galls galions per second A galim gallons per minute w gal gallons per hour nas cubic feet per second En cubic feet per minute f En cubic feet per hour bs pounds per second b n pounds per minute a bh pounds per hour FPS feet per second 56 fis feet per second mH2O menes ofwater O O nwo inches of water gauge O To fwo bsi poundspersauaredinn fo ms Mev milions of revolutions e C inWC inches of water columns mimin Nm Newonmte e kman thousand cubic meters perhour le ref 117 faci 118 119 206 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq FLD loadinpercentage SP setpointin percentage FBK feedback in percentage output current in percentage Vout output vottage Fut outputfrequency Tout output torque
229. l and lead through data for the control cables Conductor size Tightening Solid or stranded Stranded with ferrule Stranded with ferrule torque without plastic sleeve with plastic sleeve Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG Nm Ibf in 0 14 1 5 26 16 0 25 1 5 23 16 0 25 1 5 23 16 314 Technical data Electric power network specification Voltage U4 Short circuit capacity Frequency Imbalance 200 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase for 200 V AC drives 380 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase for 400 V AC drives 10 variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection as defined in IEC 60439 1 is 100 kA The drive is suitable for use in a Circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage 50 60 Hz 5 maximum rate of change 17 s Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Motor connection data Voltage U2 Short circuit protection IEC 61800 5 1 UL 508C Frequency Frequency resolution Current Power limit Field weakening point Switching frequency Maximum recommended motor cable length 0 to U4 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point The motor output is short circuit proof by IEC 61800 5 1 and UL 508C 0 500 Hz 0 01 Hz See section Ratings on page 308 1 5 Py 10 500 Hz 4 8 12 or 16 k
230. l or switch off the drive power to see the LEDs At the top left Panel has no Green Driveina normal Green Drive in an alarm corner of the power or no state state Assistant Control drive Panel connection Drive in a fault state To reset the fault press RESET from the control panel or switch off the drive power Technical data 307 Technical data What this chapter contains The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks 308 Technical data Ratings Type Input Output ACS310 Ln lip lN linas Py x E U 1 A A A A hp oxo ar 24 28 42 or 08 RO roaxosae2 e7 s5 s9 61 oss ors RO foacions2 157 o8 108 172 22 3 R axsam 55 310 aaa sas 75 10 Ra oeoo e dz sos ms 19 8 ri osoasa 24 12 13 21 037 os RO xoma 40 19 21 33 oss ors RO xossa 66 33 36 se 11 18 Ri osxosaza 108 56 62 98 22 3 Ri oxo 128 73 s0 128 3 3 Ri 1 E EMC filter connected metal EMC filter screw installed 00578903 xIs D U EMC filter disconnected plastic EMC filter screw installed US parametrization E Definitions Lin continuous rms input current for dimensioning cables and fuses at ambient temperature of 40 C Lo continuous output current at max ambient te
231. leep function See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID 30 SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 PFC Start stop motor in PFC control See parameter group 81 31 PFC CONTROL Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when the drive is not running AUTOCHANGE PFC autochange operation is performed Use this option 32 only when PFC control is used FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque 4 USER MACRO User Macro 2 is active 2 All parameters No Name Value COMM COMM 1 Actual signals and parameters 173 Description Def FbEq Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de 35 energize output 1 energize output o f o a AE Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de energize output 1 energize output 0134 value 000000 1 Do co 4 i z f ooo o s om o TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 37 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 Timed function 2 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 38 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 3 Timed function 3 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 39 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 4 Timed function 4 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 40 FUNCTIONS M TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered See 41 parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG REV Revolutions counter is triggered See parameter group 29 42 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG RUN Run time counter is triggered See parameter gro
232. ler PID1 PID1 has two separate sets of parameters 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive only parameter set 1 is needed Two different parameter sets 1 and 2 are used eg when the load of the motor changes considerably in time E External Trim controller PID2 PID2 42 EXT TRIM PID can be used in two different ways e External controller Instead of using additional PID controller hardware the user can connect PID2 output via drive analog output or fieldbus controller to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve e Trim controller PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive See section Reference trimming on page 119 134 Program features E Block diagrams The figure below shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example PID control block diagram Pressure boost pump ref Actual values 4014 Frequency AA Adi reference a Pil j IMOT ref 4010 Program features 135 The following figure presents the speed scalar control block diagram for process controller PID1 eC LLY TLLY L0YZL Op Lp pue py dno al z pue Jes JajaeweJed Aid useamjeq S S ZOP Jajawueled 70 JOU 1
233. llation page 29 tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery and install the drive mechanically Planning the electrical installation page 35 tells how to check the compatibility of the motor and the drive and select cables protections and cable routing Electrical installation page 45 tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus Installation checklist page 45 contains a checklist for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive Start up and control with I O page 57 tells how to start up the drive as well as how to start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor speed through the l O interface Application macros page 99 gives a brief description of each application macro together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections It also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Program features page 117 describes program features with lists of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Actual signals and parameters page 149 describes actual signals and parameters It also lists the default values for the different macros Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus page 265 tells how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication n
234. llowing describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The drive provides one relay output RO1 An external relay output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO2 RO4 Note If five auxiliary motors are used Autochange disabled use transistor output TO in addition to relay outputs RO1 RO4 Note that max voltage at TO is 30 V DC Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 define respectively how relays RO1 RO4 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The drive assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor 0 4 5 with TO Number of auxiliary motors 1 248 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No
235. llowing table gives the summary of the default I O connections of all application macros ABB Alternate Motor Hand Auto PID Standard Potentiom Control Freq ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Ext ref 1 Hand Hand Hand Proc ref Ext ref 2 PID PID PFC Al2 Speed ref Process Process a 20 mA Auto value value Output Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed maa freq freq Stop Start eal Start fwd Stop Start Hond Hond Stop Start pulse Hand Hand Hand Si sce ae Start rev Fwd Rev dad EAS pulse Hand Handid fpg EAS a i Fwd Rev_ Const Speed ref Hand Auto Const Interlock speed speed up speed 1 input 1 input 1 Const Const Const Speed ref Fwd Rev Run Interlock speed speed speed down Auto enable input 2 input 1 input 2 Ramp pair Const Ramp pair Const Stop Start PIB PIPAS selection sana selection speed 1 Auto PID PID PFC input 2 PFOS RO Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 ae E aA cA a ae Fault A a Control Fault 1 SPFC Control PFC 102 Application macros ABB Standard macro This is the default macro It provides a general purpose l O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section Al parameters on page 161 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1
236. lso increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc See also section PFC Control macro on page 108 E SPFC control Soft Pump and Fan Control SPFC is very similar to PFC control but it ensures that all motors are started smoothly When new motors need to be started due to increasing pumping capacity need they are powered up by the drive as follows Program features 147 When the speed regulated motor reaches the full output it is disconnected from the drive and switched to direct on line connection with a slight delay in between Auxiliary motor 2 is connected to drive output After a slight delay the motor speed is increased to fulfil the pumping capacity needed Auxiliary motors 3 and 4 are started according to the same routine The motor stopping routine follows always the normal PFC routine The most important differences between PFC control and SPFC control default settings are in acceleration time 2202 decel
237. lue Description Default 11 REFERENCE Panel reference type external control location selection and SELECT external reference sources and limits See group 77 REFERENCE SELECT in the list of all parameters 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF 1 E 50 0 Hz U 60 0 Hz 12 CONSTANT Constant speed drive output frequency selection and SPEEDS values See group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS in the list of all Reese 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing See group 13 ANALOG INPUTS in the list of all parameters 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 oe mA V signal for analog input Al1 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output and lll operating delays See group 74 RELAY OUTPUTS in the list of all parameters 1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 16 SYSTEM Parameter view Run Enable parameter lock etc See group CONTROLS 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS in the list of all parameters 1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown SHORT VIEW on the control panel VIEW 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits See group 20 LIMITS in the list of all parameters 2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency 0 0 Hz FREQ 0 0 Hz 21 START STOP Start and stop modes of the motor See group 21 START STOP in the list of all parameters 2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function
238. m RO 169 6 65 202 7 95 239 941 70 276 161 634 11 24 00578903 xls D Frame Dimensions and weights size IP20 NEMA 1 H4 H5 W B Weight in mm in mm in mm in kg Ib 0 mm Ro 257 10 12 28 00578903 xls D Symbols IP20 cabinet UL open H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate H2 height with fastenings without clamping plate H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate IP20 NEMA 1 H4 height with fastenings and connection box H5 height with fastenings connection box and hood E Free space requirements Frame Free space required size Above Below On the sides mm in mm in mm in Ro Ra 75 3 7 3 o o 00578903 xls D 312 Technical data Losses cooling data and noise Mi Losses and cooling data Frame size RO has natural convection cooling Frame sizes R1 R4 are provided with an internal fan The air flow direction is from bottom to top The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and in the control circuit with minimum load I O and panel not in use and maximum load all digital inputs in the on state and the panel fieldbus and fan in use The total heat dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits Type Heat dissipation Air flow ACS350 Main circuit Control circuit x E U Rated y and hy Min Max W BTUHr W BTUHr W BTU Hr m h ft min exons 19 6s 61 2 7 7 oxo 31 10 61
239. mA 10 6ND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 Dir Stop 0 Start 1 Hand X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 ronc No fault Fault 1 8 19 RONO Digital output max 100 mA E No fault Fault 1 1 360 degree grounding under a clamp 2 The signal source must be powered externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 57 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Application macros 107 PID Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 6 PID CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 151 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A pray SE ETE zf a o Ree votage OV IOMA oe eee a ok nox soo i Tt GNO_ Anaog input creat common StL telares 0 A 8 OND Analog output circuit common He fav ante volage ouput 24 V DO mar 200 mA 10 GND Auxiiary votage output common E pcom Oita imputcammen e halon Stop 0 Start Hand
240. max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 Electrical installation 53 Connection procedure Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the cover off the frame Digital signals Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals For double shielded cables twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 Analog signals Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically Slide the terminal cover back in place A 54 Electrical installation Connecting the embedded fieldbus Embedded fieldbus can be connected to the drive with RS 485 or RS 232 E Connection diagram RS 485 The figure below shows the fieldbus connection SCR zaje Poste Terminate the RS 485 bus with a 120 ohm resistor at the end of the network by setting the jumper J701 shunts as in the figure below Fieldbus controller Jumper shunts connect the term
241. me See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0178 SAVED CO2 _ Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn CO conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0301 FB CMD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile WORD 1 on page 283 0302 FB CMD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile WORD 2 on page 283 Actual signals and parameters 157 All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0303 ia STS WORD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 283 0304 FB STS WORD JA 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile 2 on page 283 0305 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 1 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 Bit 1 Bit 1 DC OVERVOLT ss DC Bit 1 DC OVERVOLT ss Bit 2 DEV Bit2 DEVOVERTEMP sss Bit 3 ee CIRC prine 4 Reserved Bit 5 DC piet nor a aooo Bit 6 Al1 Be _ _ _ _______ Bit 7 Al2 eS _______ Bit 8 A ooo OVERTEMP Bit 9 PANEL A o A 10 Reserved Bit 11 pmen aaae STALL prone ooo 12 Reserved puten nm 13 EXT FAULT 1 es 14 EXT FAULT 2 ee ee Bit 15 EARTH FAULT ss EARTH FAULT 0306 FAULT WORD E 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 2 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287
242. meter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE MENU SAVE ENTER e Press al Assistant Control Panel or al Basic Control Panel To recall User macro 1 e Change parameter 9902 to 0 USER S1 LOAD MENU SAVE ENTER e Press DU Assistant Control Panel or DS Basic Control Panel to load The user macro can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 7605 Note User macro load restores the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings once for each motor and then to save the data as two user macros When the motor is changed only the corresponding user macro needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Program features 111 Program features What this chapter contains The chapter describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Start up Assistant E Introduction The Start up Assistant requires the Assistant Control Panel guides the user through the start up procedure helping to enter the requested data parameter values to the drive The Start up Assistant also checks that the entered values are valid ie within the allowed range The Start up Assistant calls other assis
243. meter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 0 1 kh disabled 2906 RUN TIME Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter 0 0 kh AC When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a 2904 REVOLUTION Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter O Mrev ACT When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to V V non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 0 1 kh 2907 USER MWh Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption 0 0 MWh TRIG counter Value is compared to parameter 2908 USER MWh ACT value h 194 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 6553 5 Megawatt hours If parameter value is set to zero the trigger 1 0 1 MWh is disabled MWh 2908 USER MWh Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption ACT counter When parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 Megawatt hours Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 0 1 MWh MWh JI rogi nme cton I 3001 AI lt MIN Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal NOT SEL FUNCTION falls
244. mit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected HI by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package 0000 FFFF Eg 241A hex hex 3302 LOADING Displays the version of the loading package type PACKAGE 2101 21FF 2101 hex ACS310 0x Eur Industrial Drive hex 2102 hex ACS310 0x US Industrial Drive 3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date 00 Date value in format YY WW year week 3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings 0000 FFFF Value in format XXXY hex hex XXX Nominal current of the drive in Amperes An A indicates decimal point For example if XXX is 9A7 nominal current is 9 7 A Y Nominal voltage of the drive 2 3 phase 200 240 V 4 3 phase 380 480 V 3305 PARAMETER Displays the version of the parameter table used in the TABLE drive 0000 FFFF Eg 400E hex hex o 0 O O J o O j e 000 hex All parameters No Name Value 13401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 0 0 000 Actual signals and parameters 203 Description Def FbEq Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel 103 in display mode Assistant panel 3404 3405 parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM Display value 3407 3402
245. motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed AA Vinput power Tm fout Upc Nm H2 Va TT 160 80 520 120 60 390 80 40 260 40 20 130 0 0 0 t s 1 6 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 Upc Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fout Output frequency of the drive Tm Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fout 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy E Settings Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 126 Program features DC Magnetizing When DC Magnetizing is activated the drive automatically magnetizes the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque up to 180 of the motor nominal torque By adjusting the paramagnetism time it is possible to synchronize the motor start The Automatic Start feature and DC Magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time E Settings Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2703 DC MAGN TIME Maintenance trigger A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when eg drive power consumptio
246. motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C Output current relative to motor nom current 199 Break point Motor load curve P 3007 100 127 P 3008 50 Zero speed load Motor thermal time constant Settings Parameters 3005 3009 Note It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function See section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 139 E Earth Fault Protection The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection is active only during start An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection Settings Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT E Incorrect wiring Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected Program features 131 Settings Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT Preprogrammed faults Hi Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325 of the drive nominal current E DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives HH DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL E Drive temperature The drive supervises the IGBT temperature There are two supervision limits Alarm limit and fault trip limit E Short circuit If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start
247. mp input is forced to zero Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time INV See selection DI1 INV INV See selection DI1 INV INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV i MAN u ne Ww il ne ne 2501 CRIT SPEED Activates deactivates the critical speeds function The SEL critical speed function avoids specific output frequency ranges Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz and 46 to 52 Hz To make the drive to jump over the vibration frequency ranges e Activate the critical speeds function e Set the critical frequency ranges as in the figure below output Hz 1 Par 2502 18 Hz 2 Par 2503 23 Hz 3 Par 2504 46 Hz 4 Par 2505 52 Hz reference HZ A 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the minimum limit for critical output frequency range LO 1 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in Hz The value cannot be above the maximum 1 0 1 Hz parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the maximum limit for critical output frequency HI range 1 190 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in Hz The value cannot be below the minimum 1 0 1 Hz parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO LO 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 2505 E SPEED 2 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503
248. mperature of 50 C 10 overloadability for one minute every ten minutes lon maximum continuous output current at ambient temperature of 40 C No overloadability derating 1 for every additional 1 C up to 50 C lomax maximum instantaneous output current Available for two seconds every ten minutes at start up or as long as allowed by the drive temperature Technical data 309 PN typical motor power The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4 pole motors RO R4 ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 E Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Note 1 The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Py If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Note 2 The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F E Derating The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F or if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft Temperature derating In the temperature range
249. n f Hz Programmable protection functions Al lt Min Al lt Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit Settings Parameters 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3027 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT E Panel Loss Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as control location for the drive stops communicating Settings Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR E External Fault External Faults 1 and 2 can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal Settings Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3010 3012 130 Program features E Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C when power is applied to the drive 2 Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time constant and
250. n changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals 1 O 4 Signal 1 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Signal 2 0104 CURRENT PAR FWD Signal 3 0105 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three 1 0 5 signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 07 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero eg 105 means parameter 0705 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3401 0 and 3415 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 ie no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text n A PAR FWD PAR FWD point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal O PAR FWD Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 3 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 param
251. n has exceeded the defined trigger point E Settings Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and Motor speed deceleration ramps are available It is possible to adjust the acceleration deceleration times and the ramp shape Switching between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input or fieldbus Linear The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S curve Linear Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration deceleration S curve Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed E Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Program features 127 Critical Speeds A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds drive output frequencies or speed bands output frequency bands because of eg mechanical resonance problems The user can define three critical frequencies or frequency bands E Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Constant speeds It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference Constant speed selections are ignored if e PID reference is being followed or e drive is in local control mode This function operates on a 2 ms time level E Setti
252. nation information It also shows a general diagram of power connections and control interfaces Operation principle The ACS310 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling AC motors The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive The rectifier converts three phase AC voltage to DC voltage The capacitor bank of the intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage The inverter converts the DC voltage back to AC voltage for the AC motor Rectifier Intermediate Inverter circuit 24 Operation principle and hardware description Product overview E Layout The layout of the drive is presented below The figure shows a frame size R2 drive The construction of the different frame sizes RO R4 varies to some extent Covers off R2 T An 5 i A Covers on R2 Cooling outlet through top cover Mounting holes Panel cover a Basic Control Panel b Assistant Control Panel c Terminal cover Panel connection Jumper J701 for connecting RS 485 Option connection termination resistor FlashDrop connection I O connections Power OK and Faut EDs See section 4 Switch S1 for selecting voltage or current for analog inputs LEDs on page 306 Input power connection U1 V1 W1 and motor connection U2 V2 W2 Braking chopper connection is disabled 6 I O clamping plate Clamping plate EMC filter grounding screw EMC Note The screw is on the front in frame size
253. nce trimming PID2REF SRC on page 119 PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4210 ie signal 0129 1 PID 2 SETPNT value PID2OUTPUT PID2 output ie signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 4 M gt El JUMP Protec 4401 INLET PROT Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision CTRL of pump fan inlet pressure Note Inlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL Primary inlet pressure supervision not used ALARM Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the 1 control panel display 230 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PROTECT Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the 2 control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4408 INLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently exceeds the supervision level The following diagram describes the inlet pressure supervision function Measured inlet pressure PFC reference EXT 2 FAULT Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4402 Al MEASURE Selects the analog input for pump fan inlet pressure NOT SEL INLET supervision NOT SEL No analog input selected 0 Pump fan inlet pressure monitored through analog input Al1 See selection Al1 4403 Al IN LOW Sets the supervision limit for the prima
254. ncy limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor E 25 0 Hz The first auxiliary motor stops if U 30 0 Hz e only one the first auxiliary motor is running e drive output frequency drops below limit 8772 1 Hz e output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8112 1 Hz for at least time 8776 AUX MOT STOP D After the first auxiliary motor stops output frequency increases by value 8709 START FREQ 1 8772 LOW FREQ 1 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor 246 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq See the figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency decreases 1 On Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 Hz and 8109 START FREQ 1 f Hz 8112 8112 1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency motor See 8772 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete et of U 30 0 Hz the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e two auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency drops below limit 8773 1 Hz e output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8773 1 Hz for at lea
255. nderload 3 curve or exceeding the overload curve 3702 USER LOAD C Defines the action wanted during load supervision FAULT FUNC FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C MODE ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C MODE 3703 USER LOAD C Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time oe S TIME is used as the limit for generating an alarm 10 400 s 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition 5 Hz point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz 3705 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the first underload curve 10 LOW 1 definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0 600 3706 LOAD TORQ _ Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition 300 HIGH 1 point 214 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value A 0 600 Torque 1 1 1 1 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve 25 Hz definition point Must be smaller than 3770 LOAD FREQ 3 0 500 Hz 3708 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the second underload curve a LOW 2 definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 Torque Torque S 1 1 1 1 3709 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of t
256. nections Check fault function parameters Contact your local ABB representative See parameter group 37 USER LOAD CURVE Check connections Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION CODE FAULT CAUSE 0041 OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan HIGH outlet too high 8A83 0307 bit 7 0042 INLET LOW Pressure at pump fan 8A80 inlet too low 0307 bit 8 0043 OUTLET HIGH Pressure at pump fan 8A82 outlet too high 0307 bit 9 0101 SERF CORRUPT FF55 0307 bit 14 0103 SERF MACRO FF55 0307 bit 14 0201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD mn 13 Drive internal error 0202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100 0307 bit 12 0206 CB ID ERROR 5000 0307 bit 11 1000 PAR HZRPM Incorrect frequency 6320 limit parameter setting 0307 bit 15 Fault tracing 299 WHAT TO DO Check piping for blocks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Check piping for blocks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Write down fault code and contact your local ABB representative Check parameter settings Check that following applies e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ lt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMU
257. ngs Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed 7 7208 CONST SPEED 7 is also used for fault functions See parameter group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 128 Program features Custom U f ratio The user can define a U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency This custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U f ratio are not sufficient eg when motor break away torque needs to be boosted Voltage V Custom U f ratio par 2618 par 2616 par 2614 par 2612 par 2610 par 2603 f Hz par 2611 par 2613 par 2615 par 2617 par 9907 Note The voltage and the frequency points of the U f curve must fulfill the following requirements 2610 lt 2612 lt 2614 lt 2616 lt 2618 and 2611 lt 2613 lt 2615 lt 2617 lt 9907 WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or motor damage overheating E Settings Additional information 2605 Custom U f ratio activation 2610 2618 Custom U f ratio settings E Diagnostics Fault o Additional information PAR CUSTOM U F Incorrect U f ratio Program features 129 IR compensation When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque Motor voltage IR compensation E Settings Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT No compensatio
258. nnected to the input power wait for 5 minutes after disconnecting the input power Checking the insulation of the assembly E Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests for example hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically E Input power cable Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive 46 Electrical installation E Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows 1 Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 10 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems WARNING If a drive
259. ns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment 16 Safety Safety in installation and maintenance These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor E Electrical safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive Aj Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when input power is applied After disconnecting the input power always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive motor or motor cable Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the ground Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause
260. nt 1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO DIGITAL See section Transistor output on page 124 DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO Oo FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO 1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO AULT 1 See parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 0 1s alo T 10 All parameters No Name Value Actual signals and parameters 181 Description Def FbEq 1807 DO OFF Defines the release delay for digital output DO 0 0s DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 1808 FO CONTENT Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output 104 SEL FO X X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 1809 FO CONTENT MIN zX 1810 FO CONTENT MAX aX 1811 MINIMUM FO 10 16000 Hz 1812 MAXIMUM FO 10 16000 Hz 1813 FILTER FO 0 0 10 0 s 1814 DI1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 1816 DI2 ON DELAY 1817 DI2 OFF DELAY 1818 DI3 ON DELAY Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows FO FO 1812 1812 1811 1809 1810 FO 1809 1810 FO content content Setting range depend
261. ntinue operation in case of a panel communication break 3003 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal NOT SEL FAULT 1 NOT SEL Not selected Actual signals and parameters 195 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1 1 Fault 1 trip EXT FAULT 1 Motor coasts to stop 0 No external fault pa See selection SSCS ps A ns DI1 INV External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1 0 Fault trip EXT FAULT 1 Motor coasts to stop 1 No external fault DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 22 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV EN DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV PO DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 3004 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal NOT SEL FAULT 2 See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 ond 3005 MOT THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor FAULT PROT overtemperature is detected NOT SEL Protection is inactive io FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the 1 temperature exceeds 110 C and the motor coasts to a stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP when the motor 2 temperature exceeds 90 C 3006 MOT THERM _ Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal TIME model ie the time within the motor temperature has reached 63 of the nominal temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors
262. o Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 1 100 0 Gain When value is set to 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value When value is set to 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value 4002 INTEGRATION Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller TIME The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable A Error B Error value step C Controller output with gain 1 D Controller output with gain 10 A B D 4001 10 C 4001 1 0 NOT SEL Integration time If parameter value is set to zero integration 1 0 1 s 3600 0s I part of the PID controller is disabled 216 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4003 DERIVATION Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller 0 0s TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The derivative is filtered with a
263. of all signals and parameters The list of these signals and parameters starts on page 752 To be able to view all actual signals and parameters set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW The descriptions of all actual signals and parameters start on pages 754 and 767 respectively Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting possible Groups 01 04 contain actual signals Def Parameter default value Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Groups 10 99 contain parameters Note Parameter selections are shown on the Basic Control Panel as integer values Eg parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as value 10 which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value and the integer used in serial communication Refers to types 03E with European parametrization Refers to types 03U with US parametrization 150 Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus equivalent Example If 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ see page 783 is set from an external control system an integer value of 1 corresponds to 0 1 Hz All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits 32768 32767 Actual signals and parameters 151 Default values with different macros When application macro is changed 9902 APPLIC MACRO the software updates the parameter values to their default v
264. of contents List of related Manuals accord e desert tn ks eu der ake a E AN eset da E a oe BN ws E 2 1 Safety What this Chapter contains e is ode oe dle a Ew Sees owed Ow Hee eke eH eee HER 15 MISS Ol WARM GS se sien tac areas are de oo ia sen bak de Sone at ok hn AGE She he Bh ec sh ce karts ee sd 15 Safety in installation and maintenance 0 cc ees 16 EPICCWiCal Saler atrasada bah oh se 16 General safety miis aa me Mais dei hh Re eho Ge A SIO aD Son She A Se Ow 17 Safe start up and operation 1 0 0 0 0 eee eee ens 17 EA ETETE i 2 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains nanana aaa aaea RR EERE OED EEE he ee ee G 19 ADDII AONI 5 usaba sed aa hrs a td a a dar ae a Jee eee a Sikes oa 19 Target AU GION CC seses gae tiie ag E eh eed tok OR ie De E a ews 19 Purpose or the manual cacas roer dare ses eee ee ewes eee 19 Contents of this manual 2 0 0 0 00 ce eee teen ees 20 Related documents so rd seda nds edi add wane eden hen dene buds dar 21 Categorization by frame size 6 naaa ees 21 Quick installation and commissioning flowchart 000 eee eee eee 22 3 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains sanaaa aaaea ee eee ete eae 23 Operation PRINCIPLE seses s a ds Soa ao Reed te ae ea ele 23 PHOGUCUOVEIVICW 52 5 sate doe w ai eet Hoe an Widnes Sree eee we ee ew wee o 24 CAVO 42 roca aida fever ee he tad ke aoa eee ee e
265. on DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV Actual signals and parameters 187 Description Def FbEq Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1 2 selection 7 ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 283 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile 1 See selection DI1 INV Defines the acceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0 s speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2208 MAXIMUM FREQ e If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 75 180003 DE 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Defines the deceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0 s speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2208 MAXIMUM FREQ to zero e If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set de
266. ons 3001 U 60 0 Hz AI lt MIN FUNCTION and 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1209 TIMED MODE Selects timed function activated speed into use when CS1 2 3 4 SEL parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL selection is TIMED FUNC 1 4 or TIMED FUN1 amp 2 EXT CS1 2 3 External speed reference or constant speed selection with 1 TIMED FUNC n 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED Operation FUNC n 0 External reference 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 External speed reference or constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Operation FUNC 1 FUNC 2 0 External reference 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 1 1 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 170 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value CS1 2 3 4 1301 MINIMUM Al 100 0 100 0 1302 MAXIMUM AI Description Def FbEq Constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC n 1 timed 2 function active 0 timed function inactive TIMED Operation FUNC n Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 Constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Operation FUNC 1 FUNC 2 Speed defined by parameter 120
267. op buttons are disabled E Default I O connections X1A 1 SER Signal cable steed seen AS h an Mal ten Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max sitahin 6 GND Analog input circuit common ker a Motor speed value 0 20 mA e GND Analog output cireuitcommon 9 20 in volage output 24 V DC max 20 MA 10 6D Auxiliary voltage output common r pcom Digital input common i2 o_ start pulse F X1B 18 ronca A EE 20 DOSRC 21 ESC 22 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp SPEEDS Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 lbf in DI3 DI4 Operation parameter o o Set speed through Alt 11 0 Speed 1 1202 Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 o M Speed 2 1209 104 Application macros Alternate macro This macro provides an I O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 ALTERNATE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 151 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1A 1 Scr Sana cable shide zim a Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0
268. open 0 0 0 cc eee Frame size R2 NEMA 1 222 2 000086 4646 artos e Sor eka oe kee Cee ie Boe Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 0 cee ee Plame size R3 NEMA T sica daa avn eee ee wed OE oe Se eS SRE en eae Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 0 0 cc ee Frame size R4 NEMAT vec ccecheen 3 chee Pee cow ae 9 65080655655 450E Soe eRe LES Further information Product and Service inquiries 0 ccc ete teen ees 333 Produc WANING mesias covers bees hehehe e eee ee Meee ew eee ae 4 333 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 0000 cece eee ee ees 333 Document library on the Internet 0 0 0 eet eee ene 333 14 Table of contents Safety 15 Safety What this chapter contains The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the drive AN Use of warnings Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger The following warning symbols are used in this manual Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning war
269. ordance with EN 60947 2 HH Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive Check that the 3 phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to the rating table in section Ratings on page 308 The table lists the typical motor power for each drive type Selecting the power cables E General rules Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations e The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load currents See section Ratings on page 308 for the rated currents e The cable must be rated for at least 70 C maximum permissible temperature of the conductor in continuous use For US see section Additional US requirements on page 38 e The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor same cross sectional area e 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC e Refer to chapter Technical data on page 307 for the EMC requirements A symmetrical shielded motor cable see the figure below must be used to meet the EMC requirements of the CE and C Tick marks A four conductor system is allowed for input cabling but a shielded symmetrical cable is recommended Compared to a four conductor system the use of a symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear
270. ower cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used The power cables must be rated for 75 C 167 F Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure Use separate conduits for input power motor and control wiring Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit Armored cable shielded power cable Six conductor three phases and three ground type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers trade names in parentheses e Anixter Wire amp Cable Philsheath e BICC General Corp Philsheath e Rockbestos Co Gardex e Oaknite CLX Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers e Belden e LAPPKABEL LFLEX e Pirelli Selecting the control cables E General rules All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded Use a double shielded twisted pair cable Figure a for example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables for analog signals Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use common return for different analog signals Planning the electrical installation 39 A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but a single shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable
271. p 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies See the figure for parameter 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 NOT SEL 0 0 Not selected 1 1800 0s 0 1 1800 s Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time AUTOCHNG 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL NOTSEL _ Notselected O 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 2 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors EVEN ORDER RUN TIME EVEN RUN Time sharing is active The start order depends on the run 1 TIME times RELAY The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays 2 ORDER 0 0 9802 COMM PROT Activates the external serial communication and selects the NOT SEL SEL interface NOT SEL STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus Interface RS 485 provided by optional 1 FMBA 01 Modbus Adapter connected to drive terminal X3 See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded field
272. p date DI2 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE DI3 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE DI4 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE DI5 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE CONT MODE Timed function enabled in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the stop date DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 Timed function enable on the 1 falling edge of DI1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV n NJ Ol amp N Ni on A a po gt oO if 210 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI1 INV CM Timed function enable on the falling edge of DI1 Timed 11 function is in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the stop date 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1 The time can be changed in 2 00 00 00 second steps 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 07 00 00 the timed function is activated at 7 00 7 a m 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1 The time can be changed in 2 00 00 00 second steps 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 18 00 00 the timed function is deactivated at 18 00 6 p m ae id es If parameter value is set to MONDAY timed E unction 1 is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 CN a 5 e If pa
273. p level PID reference 4070 Wake up deviation 4025 If parameter 4005 is set to 1 Wake up level PID reference 4070 Wake up deviation 4025 Wake up level when 4005 1 PID reference Wake up level when 4005 0 t See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Xx Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4026 WAKE UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4026 WAKE UP Defines the wake up delay for the sleep function See 0 50 s DELAY parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 00 60 00s Wake up delay 0 01 s am 4027 PID 1 PARAM Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal SET 1 SET that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2 PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4007 4026 PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4101 4126 See selection DI1 SET 2 PID SET 2 is active IMED FUNC 1 Timed PID SET 1 2 control Timed function 1 inactive PID SET 1 timed function 1 active PID SET 2 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O PID SET 2 1 PID SET 1 i See selection DI1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIS 7 See selection DI1 INV See selection DI1 INV See selection DI1 INV See selection DI1 INV i 224 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Descri
274. par 7202 CONST SPEED 7 1 0 1 Speed defined by par 7203 CONST SPEED 2 0 Speed defined by par 7204 CONST SPEED 3 0 Speed defined by par 1205 CONST SPEED 4 1 1 O Speed defined by par 1206 CONST SPEED 5 1 0 O Speed defined by par 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 0 O Speed defined by par 7208 CONST SPEED 7 DI3 4 5 INV See selection DI1 2 3 INV 1202 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 1 E 5 0 Hz SPEED 1 U 6 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1203 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 2 E 10 0 Hz SPEED 2 U 12 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz Actual signals and parameters 169 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1204 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 3 E 15 0 Hz SPEED 3 U 18 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1205 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 4 E 20 0 Hz SPEED 4 U 24 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1206 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 5 E 25 0 Hz SPEED 5 U 30 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1207 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 6 E 40 0 Hz SPEED 6 U 48 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1208 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 7 E 50 0 Hz SPEED 7 Constant speed 7 is used also with fault functi
275. parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4426 PIPEFILL Defines the maximum time Precharge is allowed to operate NOT SEL TIMEOUT If this time elapses PID is preset and PID is allowed to run as it is parameterized with or without reference ramps ria NOT SEL A NOT SEL ou S 60000 s Max e SRA time 4501 ENERGY meS or disables ihe energy T which Spies OPTIMIZER the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed IAN LE IC O 4502 ENERGY Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when energy 0 00 PRICE savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH Currency 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 0 00 655 35 Price of energy per kWh a 0 1 Currency 4507 CO2 CONV Conversion factor used for multiplying the saved energy in 0 5 FACTOR MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2 tn MWh 0 0 6553 5 Conversion factor 1 0 1 tn MWh tn MWh 4508 PUMP POWER Pump power when connected directly to supply Used for 100 0 reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 0 0 1000 0 Pump power in percent of nominal motor power 1 0 1 4509 ENERGY Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED K
276. process PID controller SETPNT2 reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 2 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4037 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller SETPNT3 reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 3 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4038 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller SETPNT4 reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 4 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4039 INT SETPNT _ Selects the source for the selection of the internal setpoint NOT SEL SEL used as the process PID controller reference when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL Example 4010 SET POINT SEL INTERNAL 4039 INT SETPNT SEL DI2 Digital input DI2 1 gt 4072 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used as the reference NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used as the reference ie SETPNT2 is used 226 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI1 2 Selects with digital inputs DI1 and DI2 which internal T7 setpoint is used as the referen
277. ption Def FbEq s00 500 vauenpereet ow __ 000 5000 Vale percent 4030 SLEEP BOOST Defines the boost time for the sleep boost step See parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST STEP Reference 4030 SLEEP 4031 SLEEP BOOST TIME BOOST STEP i 0 0 3600 0 s Sleep boost time eee Sleep boost time eee time 1 1 0 1s 1 1 0 1s 4031 SLEEP BOOST When the drive is entering sleep mode the reference PID 0 0 STEP setpoint is increased by this percentage for the time defined by parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME 0 0 100 0 Sleep boost step 4032 PID REF ACC Defines the time for the reference PID setpoint increase from 0 to 100 Note Parameters 4032 4036 are active even if the process PID set 2 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 is used 1800 0 s Acceleration time time 1 0 1s 1 1 0 1s 4033 PID REF DEC Defines the time for the reference PID A decrease 0 0s TIME from 100 to 0 0 0 1800 0s Deceleration time 4034 PID REF Freezes the input reference PID setpoint of the process NOT SEL FREEZE PID controller norse Not selected O Din Ses selection DHINV A in See selecion DUI 4035 PID OUT Freezes the of the process PID controller NOT SEL FREEZE NOT SEL Not selected Oo Output is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1 D2 See selection DIT Actual signals and parameters 225 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq an 4036 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the
278. quency output is 2 ms E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Transistor output settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0163 Transistor output status 0164 Transistor output frequency Actual signals Several actual signals are available e Drive output frequency current voltage and power e Motor speed and torque e Intermediate circuit DC voltage e Active control location LOCAL EXT1 or EXT2 e Reference values e Drive temperature e Operating time counter h kWh counter e Digital I O and analog I O status e PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display one signal on the basic panel display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs E Settings Parameter Additional information 1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision Program features 125 Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the control panel E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 07 OPERATING DATA 04 Lists of actual signals FAULT HISTORY Power loss ride through If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating
279. r Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Al as reference source Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input processing 3001 3021 3022 3107 AI loss supervision Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Al in motor temperature measurement Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Al as PID process control reference or actual value 42 EXT TRIM PID source Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Al as pump protection measurement source Program features 121 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information gt 0121 Analog input values A R Alam ssi Aam SS aaa LOSS Al2 LOSS r a signal below Al1 A12 FAULT LIMIT i A Al1 a Al2 LOSS Ee signal below limit Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect Al signal scaling 1302 lt 1301 or 1305 lt 1304 Programmable analog output One programmable current output 0 20 mA is available Analog output signal can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc The update cycle for the analog output is 2 ms It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link E Settings Additional information Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0124 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect
280. r against unit power Check motor and motor cable Check that undervoltage controller is on parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Check input power supply and fuses Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper analog control signal levels Check connections Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper analog control signal levels Check connections 296 Fault tracing 0009 0010 0012 0014 0015 0016 FAULT MOT OVERTEMP 4310 0305 bit 8 programmable fault function 3005 3009 3504 PANEL LOSS 5300 0305 bit 9 programmable fault function 3002 MOTOR STALL 7121 0305 bit 11 programmable fault function 3010 3012 EXT FAULT 1 9000 0305 bit 13 programmable fault function 3003 EXT FAULT 2 9001 0305 bit 14 programmable fault function 3004 EARTH FAULT 2330 0305 bit 15 programmable fault function 3077 CAUSE WHAT TO DO Motor temperature is too high or appears to be too high due to excessive load insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit set by parameter 3504 FAULT LIMIT Control panel selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating Motor is operating in stall region due to eg excessive load or insufficient motor power External fault 1 External fault 2 Drive has detected earth ground faul
281. r current dp ATN CA eN Use external power supply 10 V GND 10 V PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink x1 x1 9 24 f2 or 13 Diz 14 DIS 15 bia 16 Ds External power supply for digital inputs For using an external 24 V supply for the digital inputs see the figure below PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 9 24V 0 V DC e _ 24 V DC ODE voce m DCONT 12D mn m D2 m D paoe 14 DIS 15 pa 15 oa 16 Ds 16 ps Frequency input If DI5 is used as a frequency input see section Frequency input on page 123 for how to set parameters accordingly Electrical installation 51 Connection example of a two wire sensor Hand Auto PID Control PFC Control and SPFC Control macros see section Application macros on page 99 use analog input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams for these macros show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor WA eee Al2 Process actual value measurement or reference 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC max 200 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thu
282. r settings Following must apply e The actual number of PFC motors parameter 8727 MOTORS matches the PFC motors in parameter group 74 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV See parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS Check parameter 2610 USER DEFINED U1 2617 USER DEFINED F4 settings Disable frequency output or frequency input e change transistor output to digital mode value of parameter 7804 TO MODE DIGITAL or change frequency input selection to other value in parameter groups 11 REFERENCE SELECT 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and 42 EXT TRIM PID Check parameter settings Following must apply e 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 lt 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 lt 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 IAIAIAIA 302 Fault tracing Embedded fieldbus faults Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters See also fault alarm SERIAL 1 ERR E No master device If there is no master device on line parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged What to do e Check that the network master is connected and properly configured e Check the cable connection E Same de
283. r speed regulated motors in the DELAY system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the drive power output Delays motor start for time 8722 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 AUX MOT START D for delay WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay After the drive relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter Actual signals and parameters 259 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control or SPFC control When enabled PFC NOT SEL control or SPFC control does the following e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8174 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency e Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line e Provides Interlock functions if enabled NOT SEL Disabled oe ACTIVE PFC control enabled SPFC ACTIVE SPFC control enabled Soft Pump and Fan Control is us
284. rameter is set to FRIDAY timed function 1 is 3604 deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 Ses parameter 3602 STARTTIMET f P parameter 3602 START TIME 3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME OoOo 3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 Ses parameter 3604 START DAYI TO 3609 STOP DAY See parameter 3605 STOP DAY T Ses parameter 3605 STOP DY T 3610 START TIME 3 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 3611 STOP TIMES See parameter 3603 STOP TIME M See parameter 3603 STOP TIME TO 3612 START DAYS See parameter 3004 START DAY 1 See parameter 3004 START DAY 1 3613 STOP DAYS Ses parameter 3605 STOP DAY SOS Actual signals and parameters 211 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq fF See parameter 3605 STOP DAY O 614 START TIME 4 615 STOP TIME 4 616 START DAV 617 STOP DAYA Selects the source for the booster activation signal NOT SEL SEL NOT SEL No booster activation signal DI1 Digital input DI1 1 active O inactive Di2 Di3 Di4 5 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive NV See selection DMUNV T DIS INV See selection DIMINV SSCS 3 1 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated TIME after the booster activation signal is switched off
285. relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 Speed reg motor Not allowed DI2 DI5 Free DI1 Speed reg motor DI1 First PFC relay DI2 First PFC relay DI2 DI5 Free DI3 DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Third PFC relay DI5 Free DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Free Not allowed First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Fifth PFC relay All parameters No Name Value DI2 Actual signals and parameters 255 Description Def FbEq Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 2 starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0
286. resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT 1 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 DI4U 5D See selection DI3U 4D DI4U 5D NC See selection DI3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input 1104 REF MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF 1 0 Hz Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal 0 0 500 0 Hz Minimum value in Hz Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the reference source value of parameter 1103 is Al1 The reference minimum and maximum correspond to the 7307 MINIMUM Al1 and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows REF Hz NO IN Ww CO CO N N mk mk NO O N O al Dh REF1 MAX 1105 REF1 MIN REF1 MIN 1301 1302 1104 REF1 MAX 1105 166 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 E 50 0 Hz Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source U 60 0 Hz signal ee 0 500 0 Hz Maximum value in Hz See the example for parameter 1104 1 eae 1 Hz D0 500 0Hz Mad MIN E REVPAD See parameter
287. rol press C gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly e To start the drive in local control press CH gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapidly It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can plane the direction of the motor rotation in any mode If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows message LoC before returning to the previous display To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST 72 Control panels Hi Output mode In the Output mode you can e monitor actual values of up to three group 07 OPERATING DATA signals one signal at a time e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing 277 until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one group 07 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the REM 4 91 me right Page 75 tells how to select up to three signals to outTPuT FWD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page 75
288. roup 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 Actual signals and parameters 229 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TIMED FUNC 3 TIMED FUNC 4 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive DIS INV See selection DONY SS DIS INV See selection DIN CS 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output When PID controller is activated controller output starts from the offset value When PID controller is deactivated controller output is reset to the offset value Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL 0 0 100 0 Value in percent I o1 BY Q a Dh 0 1 4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct NOT SEL and proportional trimming With trimming it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference See section Reference trimming on page 119 NOT SEL No trim function selected PROPORTION Active The trimming factor is proportional to the rom Hz AL reference before trimming REF 1 DIRECT Active The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum limit used in the reference control loop maximum speed frequency or torque 4231 TRIM SCALE _ Defines the multiplier for the trimming function See section 0 0 Reference trimming on page 119 100 0 100 0 Multiplier 1 0 1 4232 CORRECTION Selects the trim reference See section Refere
289. rrently in Listen Only Mode no response is returned If the port is not currently in Listen Only Mode a normal response is returned before the restart 04 Force Listen Only Mode Forces the addressed slave device to Listen Only Mode This isolates it from the other devices on the network allowing them to continue communicating without interruption from the addressed remote device No response is returned The only function that will be processed after this mode is entered is the Restart Communications Option function subcode 01 Writes to the registers 1 to approximately 120 registers in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Read Write Performs a combination of one read operation and one write Multiple operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus Write Multiple Holding Registers Diagnostics 8 08 Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between the master and the slave devices or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave The following subcodes are supported 00 Return Query Data The data passed in the request data field is to be returned in the response The entire response message should be identical to the request 01 Restart Communications Option The slave device serial line 7 23 Holding transaction The write operation is performed before the read Registers operation E Register mapping The dri
290. rrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running eg because start enable is missing 3 Panel operation e Name of the current mode mode e Name of the list or menu shown e Name of the operation state eg PAR EDIT 4 Reference value or e Reference value in the Output mode number of the e Number of the highlighted item eg selected item mode parameter group or fault E Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the as and Cv arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key 5 you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key 7 is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output Parameters Assistants Changed Parameters Fault Logger Time and Date Parameter Backup I O Settings and Fault The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm
291. rt of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys As and SY 7 and press SS Repeat for the second part After specifying the year press SS To cancel your changes press was To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press Pressing O opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed e To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press To return to the previous display without making changes press wa I 41 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC USET DATE I 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC _UDAYLIGHT SAV 1 OTT Australial NSwW Vict Australia2 Tasmania EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC WHELP EU On Mar last Sunday off Oct last Sunday US EXIT 00 00 Control panels 95 E Parameter Backup mode The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to two user sets to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and
292. ry inlet pressure LEVEL measurement If the value of the selected input falls below this limit the action defined by parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is taken after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires 0 00 100 00 The range corresponds to 0 10 V or 0 20 mA on the 1 0 01 analog input With a bipolar input the absolute input value is considered 4404 VERY LOW Enables and selects the mode of the secondary inlet NOT SEL CTRL pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4402 Al MEASURE INLET NOT SEL Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used STOP Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive The 1 drive will start again if the pressure exceeds the supervision level FAULT Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4405 Al IN VERY Supervision level for the secondary inlet pressure 0 00 LOW monitoring function See parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 Actual signals and parameters 231 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4406 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL INLET at the pump fan inlet The normal state is 1 active If the selected input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL is executed after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires NOT SEL No digialinput
293. s 0 1 selected as the active control location 1002 EXT2 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 40031 bits COMMANDS 0 1 START STOP when EXT2 is 0 1 selected as the active control location 1003 FORWARD Enables rotation direction control as 40031 bit 2 DIRECTION REVERSE defined by parameters 7007 and 1002 The direction control is REQUEST explained in section Reference handling on page 274 1102 Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection 40031 bit 5 EXT1 EXT2 SEL through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 bit 11 with ABB Drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 1103 REF1 COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used 40002 for REF 1 SELECT COMM AI1 when EXT1 is selected as the active control location See section Fieldbus COMM AI references on page 271 for information on the alternative settings 1106 REF2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used 40003 for REF2 SELECT COMM AI1 when EXT2 is selected as the active COMM AI1 control location See section Fieldbus references on page 271 for information on the alternative settings OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by 40134 for signal 0134 OUTPUT 1 COMM 1 signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 1501 AO1 135 Directs the contents of fieldbus 40135 for signal 0135 CONTENT SEL reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1 to analog output AO SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV COMM Enables the control of the inverted 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 Run Enable signal Run Disable t
294. s and parameters 253 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Output frequency No aux 1aux 2aux motors motor motors Area Autochange is allowed Interlock function is enabled an interlock is active when its command signal is absent an interlock is inactive when its command signal is present the drive will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows e Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 254 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 1 starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC
295. s control with embedded fieldbus The state diagram below describes the start stop function of Control Word CW and Status Word SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state Emergency Stop OFF3 CW Bit2 0 ee OFF3 SW Bit5 0 CTE f n f 0 I 0 gt gt From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 OFF1 INPUT POWER OFF SW Bit1 0 Emergency Off OFF2 CW Bit 1 0 OFF2 ala FAULT SW Bit3 1 ACTIVE M SW Bit 4 0 From any state Fault CW Bit7 1 V SWITCH ON l INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 A B CD NOT READY un Tto swiTCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1 xx xxxx x110 RR OPERATION READY TO SW Bit0 1 SU BIASD INHIBITED SWITCH ON l paai OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx X1 XX XXXX X111 ES V A O SW Bit1 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 OPERATION C D ENABLED MNS A L CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1 xx xxx1 1111 C State gt ie Bit4 1 mmm State change eae maa Path described in example D CW Control Word W Bit6 B lt SW Status Word 5 tee CW xxxx X1 xx xx11 1111 id gt ie Bit5 1 RFG Ramp Function Generator Par 0104 CURRENT f Par 0103 OUTPUT FREQ RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED O i n Speed CW xxxx x1 xx x111 1111 Supported only by ABB DRV FULL ie Bit6 1 profile SW Bit8 1 State transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source eg digital D lt input
296. s in using the panel in control monitoring and changing the settings About control panels Use a control panel to control the ACS310 read status data and adjust parameters The drive works with either of two different control panel types e Basic Control Panel This panel described in section Basic Control Panel on page 68 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values e Assistant Control Panel This panel described in section Assistant Control Panel on page 78 includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support lt is available with different language sets Compatibility The manual is compatible with the following versions e Basic Control Panel ACS CP C Rev M or later e Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A Rev E or later new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX where year YY 07 or greater and revision R E F G e Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D Rev P or later See page 82 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different Assistant Control Panels 68 Control panels Basic Control Panel E Features The Basic Control Panel features e numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for b
297. s on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO 1 Minimum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN N Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO 1000 Hz Maximum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO ie 0 1s the time within 63 of a step change is reached Filter time constant Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0 0s the digital input DI to the ON state Delay time Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0 0s the digital input DI to the OFF state Delay time See parameter 7874 DI1 ON DELAY See parameter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY See parameter 7874 DI1 ON DELAY 0 0s 182 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1819 DI3 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY 0 0 s DELAY 1820 DI4 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 D11 ON DELAY 1821 DI4 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY 0 0 s DELAY 1822 DI5 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 D11 ON DELAY 1823 DI5 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY 0 0s DELAY 2003 MAX Defines the allowed maximum motor current 1 8 lon CURRENT sl 0 0 1 8 gt lon A 0 0 1 8
298. s the output signal must be 4 20 mA 52 Electrical installation E Default I O connection diagram The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in use which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The default macro is the ABB Standard macro lt provides a general purpose l O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section Default values with different macros on page 157 For information on other macros see chapter Application macros on page 99 The default I O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below X1A SOR Serai cate sie seen 2 AN La foo Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 E 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Output tregueney vaus 0 20 MA et O 9 2280 Anan volage output 24 V DC max 200 mA ofono Auxiliary voltage output common i DCOM Digital input common 2 bit Stop 0 Start OOS X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 8 19 RONO 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters 0 0 Set speed through Al1 2205 and 2206 1 0 Speed1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp spees ST Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Digital output
299. seececeaeace sees tensetaetcavcessere peneeeeteenes 171 ID ANALOG OUTPUTS acueeeaswas sea eat ARAN ea 174 NGS SVEMCONTROMS deine open eerie see adas anes gers en aida 175 Table of contents 11 18 FREQ IN S TRAN OUT sita di ei ido 180 A errre reer eia eer toca kd come as Senet aaa eera ER ae 182 2 SAR TOP scene eee ieee seca nde sheen nad ones bons bas ds ee eas das de daa 183 22 CCEWDECEL aececceteeneateereetor in prada ty E ra es 186 2 RAMAL SPEEDO urea Poe ou ee wh eee ee Be Sh ee ee 189 20 MOTOR CONTROL a aati apd eaten arden aa Guat eee ainda Sad ltd i deeb dg fotis 190 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG occcccc eee 193 SJOU FAULT FUNCTIONS sa30246 ec8teGsendncedasee cease ae ee Cam 88 cake eee 194 31 AUTOMATIC RESET axceccetotevavenden uri a 199 32 DUPERVISION 2 mice des hrrrta e ewer heehee eetedeasseeerseese ped 200 So INFORMATION lt nctedescatcectecannatdodcted sere teatiaeedeed ade hanes lt 202 34 PANEL DISPLAY scare sa prolijo See ees eds ated eps eaten 203 39 MOTOR TEMP MEAS x ies dice ho denis dara ee dida Oi aoe eee tute a ci ater oia 207 oe TIMED FUNCTIONS 22 94 4250524 6 ama drid Aa See E e 209 3r USER LOAD CURVE vacias eure oe ObG teed ee eedbaree ee oe oes cues 213 40 PROCESS RIDSET T ascii so ass a ao tee dr aS eee aie 214 Al PROCESS FID Cel 2 sere empe a ps pd eee to ee ek ee 226 A2 EAT TRIM PID ne ee a ee ee ee ee ee 227 44 PUMP PROTECTION sesion eds e os dedos Y OS 229 a ENERO SAVING o4s2ans0es boeken eons es
300. selection SUPRV1 UNDER 30 UNDER i 31 3 3 SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 OVER OVER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER UNDER SUP1OVER Start and stop as for SUPRV1 OVER Direction through DI2 digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST SUP1 Start and stop as for SUPRV1 UNDER Direction through UDR DI2 digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST 1002 EXT2 Defines the connections and the source for the start stop NOT SEL COMMANDS Jand direction commands for external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 7007 EXT1 COMMANDS 1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor or fixes REQUEST the direction Note The Pump cleaning function can override this parameter See parameter 4607 PUMP CLEAN TRIG FORWARD Fixed to forward 2 Actual signals and parameters 163 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq REVERSE Fedtoreverse OOO OOOO U O O dP REQUEST Direction of rotation control allowed 11 REFERENCE Panel reference type i ntrol location selection and 1101 eo REF Selects the type of the reference in local control mode REF 1 REF1 Hz rpm Frequency reference in Hz REF2 reference 2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal EXT 1 SEL that selects between the two external control locations EXT1
301. ssing EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press 7 repeatedly until you get there Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key lt a gt Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display means forward and 5 reverse Press to stop the motor To change the direction of the motor rotation If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not visible first set parameter 7677 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW Invert the phases by changing the value of parameter 9914 to the opposite ie from O NO to 1 YES or vice versa Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above Set parameter 9914 back to 2 SHORT VIEW REM UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 at 00 00 SAVE REM YU CHOICE EXT1 reference setup SK1p EXIT 00 00 OK XX X DIR 00 00 MENU reverse direction direction REM UPAR EDIT 1611 PARAMETER VIEW LONG VIEW 3 NEL 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT 9914 PHASE INVERSION 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 64 Start up and control with I O After the whole set up is completed check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink Start up and control with l O 65 How to control the drive through the I O interface The table below instructs how to operate the drive through th
302. st of related manuals for more information The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery installing and commissioning the drive The flowchart refers to chapters sections in this manual Applicability The manual is applicable to the ACS310 drive firmware version 4 00E or later See parameter 3307 FIRMWARE on page 202 Target audience The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols The manual is written for readers worldwide Both SI and imperial units are shown Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given Purpose of the manual This manual provides information needed for planning the installation installing commissioning using and servicing the drive 20 Introduction to the manual Contents of this manual The manual consists of the following chapters Safety page 15 gives safety instructions you must follow when installing commissioning operating and servicing the drive Introduction to the manual this chapter page 19 describes applicability target audience purpose and contents of this manual It also contains a quick installation and commissioning flowchart Operation principle and hardware description page 23 describes the operation principle layout power connections and control interfaces type designation label and type designation information in short Mechanical insta
303. st time 8776 AUX MOT STOP D 005000 Hz Frequeney O 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary 25 motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of U 30 0 Hz the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e three auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency drops below limit 8114 1 Hz e output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 5000 Fz 1 01H 8115 AUX MOT Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors START D The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Actual signals and parameters 247 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 8116 AUX MOT Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors 3 0s STOP D The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 1 8117 NR OF AUX Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor MOT requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The fo
304. stant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor Set up Assistant is used as an example Display Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until PARAMETERS you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on ILoc Y ASSISTANTS 1 the menu keys As and SY 2 and pressing S Motor Set up Application Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the assistant keys lt An and SY 7 and press LOC UPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT If you select any other assistant than the Start up Assistant it guides you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor Set up Assistant is used here as an example EXIT 00 00 SAVE If you select the Start up Assistant it activates the first LOC CHOICE assistant which guides you through the task of Do you want pS specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 con and 5 below The Start up Assistant then asks if you Bicone much eerie want to continue with the next assistant or skip it select 1p the appropriate answer with keys aS and Ty and EXIT 00 00 OK press Sy If you choose to skip the Start up Assistant asks
305. start inhibit from fieldbus Fault tracing 287 Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history It also lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive Read the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 75 before you work on the drive Alarm and fault indications Fault is indicated with a red LED See section LEDs on page 306 An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected If not contact an ABB representative The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265 How to reset RESET EXIT The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key Basic Control Panel or SP Assistant Control Panel through digital input or fieldbus or by switching the supply voltage off for a while The source for the fault reset signal is selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted 288 Fault tracing Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in the Fault History The latest faults are stored together with the time stamp Parameters 0
306. t in motor or motor cable Check motor ratings load and cooling Check start up data Check fault function parameters Check value of fault limit Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check panel connection Check fault function parameters Check control panel connector Refit control panel in mounting platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters Check external devices for faults Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 setting Check external devices for faults Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 setting Check motor Check fault function parameters Check motor cable Motor cable length must not exceed maximum specifications See section Motor connection data on page 314 0018 0021 0022 0024 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 FAULT THERM FAIL 5210 0306 bit 1 CURR MEAS 2211 0306 bit 4 SUPPLY PHASE 3130 0306 bit 5 OVERSPEED 7310 0306 bit 7 DRIVE ID 5400 0306 bit 9 CONFIG FILE 630F 0306 bit 10 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510 0306 bit 11 programmable fault function 3018 3019 EF
307. tage and therefore the load torque oscillation DISABLE Disabled io ENABLE Enabled 2 NAI aint rigge 2901 COOLING FAN Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time 0 0k TRIG counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING FAN ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 0 1 kh disabled 0 0 k value of the counter exceeds the value defined by a 2902 COOLING FAN Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter ACT When parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel O O kh 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 0 1 kh 2903 REVOLUTION Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter O Mrev TR Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT value 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions If parameter value is set to zero the 1 1 trigger is disabled Mre re 0 a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions Parameter is reset by setting it to 1 1 zero M 2905 RUN TIME Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter Value 0 0 kh TRIG is compared to parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If para
308. tants each of which guides the user through the task of specifying a related parameter set At the first start the drive suggests entering the first task Language Select automatically The user may activate the tasks either one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all See section Assistants mode on page 89 on how to start the Start up Assistant or other assistants 112 Program features E Default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests The default tasks are shown in the table below Application selection Default tasks ABB STANDARD Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals 3 WIRE Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals ALTERNATE Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals MOTOR POT Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Tim
309. te a hee a eae ee Rake ae ne oar ee Ge nae ee Boe 140 10 Table of contents EVANS e OP o EII cas ast ee mah ee wn ed a ake Rew wires Steg ora we eed tes al ad 140 Tied sUnCUONS inane dora ened woe eee he eed Re eee eee heed Bek 141 Een E sn sed ae ae old ee ee Oe ee ee don eee ee 142 DOWNS peda d ke E eee 142 SCP IO AG CUS ue ne ea le a te ath ae Sea ee a aL ae A a ee a 143 SINGS A arene Picton sho wi E dearer de hind amp Alans Hoan peek hare ee A 143 eos APA 143 Energy OPUMIZE viuriprror ae Peta be bes poe aa ea de we Oa x 144 SOUS ae 06 4 aoe ts Ob Ree ie Son ded dh hee Ge Bd oe De Oa a tn OO 144 VAIN OS CS sie a pee ttt oor II a a hp ale 144 Pump cleaning nota oh hoe PARE eh PRA eee de 144 009 o Ao 145 LAAN AY ZV ea che as aye pes han oo 145 Semis teres chavreot wh Coen ee ae eee he eee eee ees 145 AGIOS SS si aye E aldea wear dd gent A heath alo ch each te wean nd ce tte ae rd ero wee de 145 PFC and PEC CONTO cierne dee Ged ONL RSG OO DARE OE ew ote a 146 Pes COMMON truce a nice SNe a nek ook Bde Pee A ek a ae ae a ERE EA 146 PFE CONTON ee ee ae ee ee ee ee ee ee 146 SS 11 9 9 at cane sees E 0 eh sa nik eo a E Wea wid ovo a a anata een ate argh sh ak et 147 DB 6 2 54 ncs s Che eeosw et Ca betwee s CREME Mh a as baw Lee eh moe es 147 12 Actual signals and parameters What this Chapter CONTAINS iii es oA eb wean ae cee eee eb dew gern xan ee ee ao 149 Terms and abbreviations 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee nas 149 F
310. ted to the AC power line and drive output terminals simultaneously Planning the electrical installation 43 Protecting the contacts of relay outputs Inductive loads relays contactors motors cause voltage transients when switched off Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits varistors RC filters AC or diodes DC in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch off If not suppressed the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible Do not install protective components at the I O terminal block Varistor E 230 VAC RC filter 230 VAC 24V DC 44 Planning the electrical installation Electrical installation 45 Electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus WARNING The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified electrician Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during installation If the drive is already co
311. the application macros For each macro there is a wiring diagram showing the default control connections digital and analog I O The chapter also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Overview of macros Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets While starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros the one that is best suited for the purpose with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro The ACS310 has eight standard macros and two user macros The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications Macro Suitable applications ABB Standard Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop is controlled with one digital input level start and stop It is possible to switch between two acceleration and deceleration times 3 wire Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used The drive is started and stopped with push buttons Alternate Speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs combination of the input states determines the operation Motor Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used The Potentiometer speed is controlled by two digital inputs increase decrease keep unchangea
312. the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by UNIT parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT UNIT 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 re MIN x x Settingrange depends on parameter 3408 setting range depends on parameter Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting setting 3414 OUTPUT2 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting Actual signals and parameters 207 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3415 SIGNAL3 Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel 105 PARAM in display mode See par 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 101 178 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM setting 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT FORM parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PAR
313. the value of ad 9908 MOTOR NOM PEED to 1500 rpm results in pf ESC the wrong perio of the V drive 690 Y 50 30 1475 325 083 400D 50 30 1475 56 0 83 660 Y 50 30 1470 34 o83 0 83 HH supply 415D 50 30 1475 54 083 voltage 440D 60 35 1770 59 os3 1 Cat no 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 03 da 6210 03 180 ko gt IEC 34 1 os e motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 Setting of parameter 9905 is shown below as an example of parameter setting with the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions in section Basic Control Panel on page 68 60 Start up and control with I O _ To go to the Main menu press 37 if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press C7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom 2 Press keys ASI until you see PAr and press 37 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with keys CASH and press SI 4 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys CASH 5 Press and hold 37 for about two seconds until the parameter value is shown with under the value A Q O PAR FWD 6 Change the value with keys lt a Cv The value changes faster while you keep the key pressed 3 8 0 down PAR FWD 7 Save the parameter value by pressing 37 Enter the rest of the motor data e motor nominal current parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 lay A e motor nominal frequency parameter 9907
314. ting the acceleration and deceleration times Speed Control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed output frequency reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed reference limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value Start Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes Selecting the use of Run Enable signal Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 1103 1301 1303 3007 1104 1105 2007 2008 2202 2203 1106 1301 1303 3007 1107 1108 1106 1301 1303 3007 1107 1108 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 1001 1002 1102 1003 2101 2103 1601 Setting the current limits 2003 Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 114 Program features Name Description Setparameters Timed Functions Setting the timed functions 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Selecting th
315. tizes the motor the set time 0 00 10 00 s Magnetizing time Set this value long enough to allow full 1 0 01s motor magnetization Too long time heats the motor excessively 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC brake current If parameter 2107 DC 30 BRAKE TIME is not zero the DC brake current is injected to the motor during the stop If parameter 2702 STOP COAST FUNCTION is set to COAST DC braking is applied after the start command is removed If parameter 2702 STOP COAST FUNCTION is set to RAMP DC braking is applied after the ramp 0 100 Value in percent of the motor nominal current parameter 1 1 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE Defines the DC brake time TIME 00 26008 ime is Actual signals and parameters 185 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2108 START INHIBIT Enables the start inhibit function Drive start is inhibited if OFF fault is reset Run Enable signal activates while the start command is active See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE control mode changes from local to remote external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or from EXT2 to EXT1 OFF Disabied on Enabled 2109 EMERG STOP Selects the source for the external emergency stop command The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop command is reset Note The installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel
316. top change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value sep Action OSC Go to the Main menu by pressing 37 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing UZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the panel is not in the Parameter mode PAr not visible press key CA or SY until you see PAr and then press 37 The display shows the number of one of the parameter groups Use keys 4 53 and SY to find the desired parameter group Press 537 The display shows one of the parameters in the selected group parameter Press and hold 37 for about two seconds until the display shows the value of the parameter with 1 underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible Note When is visible pressing keys A 53 and Cv simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter PAR FWD value When you have changed the parameter value Use keys 4 gt and SY to select the parameter starts flashing PAR FWD e To save the displayed parameter value press Yi e To cancel the new value and keep the original press Use keys 4 53 and SY to find the desired Control panels 75 How to select the monitored signals You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 4 Q 3 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 74 for detailed instructions o
317. tor with DC current before the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME Torque boost is applied at start Torque boost is stopped when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to the reference value See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when TORQ BOOST is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed although the motor magnetization is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start starting to a rotating machine Based on frequency scanning interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ to identify the frequency If frequency identification fails DC magnetization is used see selection DC MAGN SCAN Combines scanning start starting to a rotating machine BOOST and torque boost See selections SCANSTART and TORQ BOOST If frequency identification fails torque boost is used 2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function FUNCTION COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply The motor 1 coasts to a stop RAMP Stop along a ramp See parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL 2103 DC MAGN Defines the pre magnetizing time See parameter 2101 TIME START FUNCTION After the start command the drive automatically pre magne
318. uipment third edition 318 Technical data CE marking The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 2004 108 EC E Compliance with the European EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives See section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 378 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 E Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC asp
319. up 29 43 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG MWH MWh counter is triggered See parameter group 29 44 MAINTENANCE TRIG START DELAY Start delay is active USER LOAD C Alarm Fault from the user load curve See parameter group 47 37 USER LOAD CURVE PIPE FILL Pipe Fill function is active See parameters 4421 4426 53 PROFILE HIGH 53 Actual signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0732 PID 1 54 DEVIATION or 0733 PID 2 DEVIATION has stayed over limit 4479 PROFILE OUTP LIM longer than the time defined by parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY See parameters 4418 4420 INLET PROT Pump inlet protection function is active or has caused the 55 drive to trip See parameters 4407 4408 OUTLET PROT Pump outlet protection function is active or has caused the 56 drive to trip See parameters 4409 4416 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 is connected to the drive 174 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1403 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT 3 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL O is connected to the drive 1404 RO 1 ON Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1 DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time The figure below illustrates the operation on and release off delays for relay output RO Control event ne EEE Relay status it LDL l l 1 1 i 2
320. ups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Fault tracing 291 CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2021 START ENABLE 1 No Start Enable 1 Check parameter 7608 START MISSING signal received ENABLE settings 0309 bit 4 Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 No Start Enable 2 Check parameter 7609 START MISSING signal received ENABLE 2 settings 0309 bit 5 Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Drive has received Check that it is safe to continue STOP emergency stop operation 0309 bit 6 command and ramps Return emergency stop push button to to stop according to normal position ramp time defined by parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 2025 FIRST START Motor identification Wait until drive indicates that motor 0309 bit 8 magnetization is on identification is completed This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure 2027 USER LOAD Condition defined by See parameter group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USER LOAD CURVE 0309 bit 10 MODE has been valid longer than half of the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Start delay in progress See parameter 2773 START DELAY 0309 bit 11 INLET LOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 0309 bit 13 inlet too low side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 2031 OUTLET HI
321. user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter Backup mode you can e Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters e View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes eg the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match e Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system e Copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same
322. utput Extension Module STATUS MREL 0 See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English Example 100 RO 2 is on RO 3 and RO 4 are off 0174 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0175 SAVED MWH Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0176 SAVED Energy saved in local currency To find out the total saved AMOUNT 1 energy in currency units add the value of parameter 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value of parameter 0176 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0177 SAVED Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units AMOUNT 2 Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same ti
323. ve parameters Control Status Word references and actual values are mapped to the area 4xxxx so that e 40001 40099 are reserved for drive control status reference and actual values e 40101 49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101 9999 Eg 40102 is parameter 0102 In this mapping the thousands and hundreds correspond to the group number while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number within a group The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller See Exception codes on page 277 276 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus The following table gives information on the contents of the Modbus addresses 40001 40012 and 40031 40034 Modbus register Access Information SSS 40001 Control Word R W Control Word Supported only by ABB Drives profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5379 EFB PAR 19 shows a copy of the Control Word in hexadecimal format 40002 Reference 1 R W External reference REF1 See section Fieldbus references on page 271 40003 Reference 2 R W External reference REF2 See section Fieldbus references on page 271 40004 Status Word Status Word Supported only by ABB Drives profile when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 shows a
324. vice address If two or more devices have the same address parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS value increases with every read write command What to do e Check the device addresses No two devices on line may have the same address E Incorrect wiring If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one device is connected to terminal B on another device parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES value remains unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases What to do e Check the RS 232 485 interface connection Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 303 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine a intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Instruction Reforming of capacitors a E year when See Capacitors on page 305 stored Check of dustiness corrosion Every year and temperature Replacement of a aa fan Every three years See Cooling fan on page 304 frame sizes R1 Check and A of the Every six years See Power connections on page 305 power terminals Replacement of the battery in Every ten years See Changing the battery in the the Assistant Control Panel Assistant Control Panel on page 306 Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the ma
325. ward direction Minimum and maximum references are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1 MAX Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST Speed ref Par 1301 20 par 1302 100 REF1 1105 1104 1104 0 1104 E a 1105 ES Hysteresis 4 2V 4mA 6 10V 20mA Orit scale WARNING If parameter 7307 MINIMUM AI is set to O V and analog input signal is lost ie O V the rotation of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference Set the following parameters to activate a fault when analog input signal is lost Set parameter 7307 MINIMUM Al1 to 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3027 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to 5 or higher Set parameter 3007 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to FAULT DEUDA See selection Al1 JOYST DI3U 4D R Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change DI3U 4D Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME2 defines the rate of the reference change COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 ss reference REF1 COMM Al1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and Febus reference REE ernie input Al See section Reference selection and correction on p
326. whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged If you have an IT ungrounded or corner grounded TN system disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw For 3 phase U type drives with type designation ACS310 03U the EMC screw is already removed at the factory and replaced by a plastic one Note In frame size R4 the EMC screw is located to the right of terminal W2 Electrical installation 47 Connecting the power cables E Connection diagram OUTPUT For alternatives see section PE Selecting the supply ae disconnecting device r disconnecting means on Eh page 35 eo A 1 Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board 2 Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient smaller than the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable See section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Note Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding
327. with screws bolts mounting hardware screws or bolts if the drive will be installed with screws bolts For the number of screws bolts see With screws on page 32 Mechanical installation 31 Unpacking The drive 1 is delivered in a package that also contains the following items frame size R2 shown in the figure e plastic bag 2 including clamping plate also used for I O cables in frame sizes R3 and R4 I O clamping plate for frame sizes RO R2 clamps and screws e panel cover 3 e mounting template integrated into the package 4 e short user s manual 5 e possible options Basic Control Panel Assistant Control Panel or complete User s Manual Checking the delivery Check that there are no signs of damage Notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found Before attempting installation and operation check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type See section Type designation label on page 26 32 Mechanical installation Installing The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection To comply with NEMA 1 use the MUL R1 MUL R3 or MUL R4 option kit which is delivered with multilingual installation instructions 3AFE68642868 3AFE68643147 or 3AUA0000025916 respectively E Install the drive Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate Note Make sure that dust from
328. y Output Extension Module MREL O is connected to the drive e 1402 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 2 3 and 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non zero values See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 83AUA0000035974 English Check fieldbus parameter settings Check parameter settings Following must apply e 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 e 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor poles lt 0 992 1012 1013 1014 1015 1017 1026 FAULT PAR PFC IO 1 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR PFC IO 2 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR PFC IO 3 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR CUSTOM U F 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR SETUP 1 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR USER LOAD C 6320 0307 bit 15 Fault tracing 301 CAUSE WHAT TO DO I O configuration for PFC not complete I O configuration for PFC not complete I O configuration for PFC not complete The drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor Incorrect voltage to frequency U f ratio voltage setting It is not allowed to use frequency input signal and frequency output signal simultaneously Incorrect user load curve parameter setting Check parameter settings Following must apply e There are enough relays parameterized for PFC e No conflict exists between parameter group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Check paramete

ACS310 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents